Year 5 Short Division and Remainders: worked examples and questions with answers
By the end of this chapter you will be able to
- Divide whole numbers and decimals by 10, 100 and 1,000 by moving the digits to the right
- Divide in your head using known facts, place value, fact families, halving and factors
- Divide a number with up to 4 digits by a one-digit number using short division (the bus stop method), exchanging remainders and writing zeros in the answer
- Decide what a remainder means in a story: round up, round down, use the remainder, or write it as a fraction or decimal
- Estimate answers and check them by multiplying back
- Solve sharing, grouping, scaling and simple rate problems
- Use the order of operations, understand the equals sign and solve multi-step problems with bar models
You should already know
- Times tables up to 12 × 12 and the matching division facts
- Short division of 2- and 3-digit numbers by one digit, with and without remainders (Year 4)
- Multiplying and dividing by 10 and 100 (Year 4) and by 10, 100 and 1,000 (Year 5 Chapter 4)
- Multiples and factors (Year 5 Chapter 3)
Where this leads
- Fractions: a fraction is a division (Chapter 6)
- Decimals and percentages (Chapter 7)
- Converting units and finding areas (Chapter 8)
- Long division and the order of operations in Year 6
National Curriculum for England, Key Stage 2 mathematics, Year 5. Content: Divide numbers up to 4 digits by a one-digit number using the formal written method of short division and interpret remainders appropriately for the context, Divide numbers mentally drawing upon known facts, Divide whole numbers and those involving decimals by 10, 100 and 1000, Solve problems involving division including scaling and simple rates, Solve problems combining operations, including understanding the meaning of the equals sign.
- 5.1 Dividing by 10, 100 and 1,000: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 5.2 Dividing in your head: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 5.3 Short division with exchanging: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 5.4 Bigger numbers, zeros, estimating and checking: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 5.5 What do we do with the remainder?: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 5.6 Sharing, grouping, scaling and rates: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 5.7 Combining operations, the equals sign and multi-step problems: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- Check-up and SATs-style questions: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
Exercise P Do you remember?
Non-calculatorKey words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 7 by to get 56?7 × ? = 56
- Count up in 7s. Say the 7 times table until you reach 56.7, 14, 21, 28, 35, 42, 49, 56
- Write the division. You said 8 numbers, so 7 × 8 = 56.56 ÷ 7 = 8
Check. 8 × 7 = 56. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 56.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 8 4 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 4 = 2
Write 2 above the 8. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 4 ones.
4 ÷ 4: 1 × 4 = 4. Write 1 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 1 4 8 4
84 ÷ 4 = 21 - Write the answer. 84 ÷ 4 = 21
Check. Multiply back: 21 × 4 = 20 × 4 + 1 × 4 = 80 + 4 = 84. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 hundreds become 3 tens
8 tens become 8 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.380 ÷ 10 = 38
- Write the answer. 380 ÷ 10 = 38
Check. Go back: 38 × 10 = 380 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 380 ends in 1 zero. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.7 ones become 7 tenths
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.7 ÷ 10 = 0.7
- Write the answer. 7 ÷ 10 = 0.7
Check. Go back: 0.7 × 10 = 7 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.7, not .7.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.5 hundreds become 5 ones
3 tens become 3 tenths - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.530 ÷ 100 = 5.3
- Write the answer. 530 ÷ 100 = 5.3
Check. Go back: 5.3 × 100 = 530 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. The answer has a decimal point because 530 does not end in enough zeros. The point goes between the ones and the tenths.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 4 7 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 5: 4 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 tens for 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 7 ones there are 40 + 7 = 47 ones.
47 ÷ 5: 9 × 5 = 45, and 47 − 45 = 2. Write 9 above the 7.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 r 2 5 4 47
47 ÷ 5 = 9 r 2 - Write the answer. 47 ÷ 5 = 9 r 2
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 5 = 45
45 + 2 (the remainder) = 47. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 5: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 5.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 6 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 96 is shared equally between 6, so divide by 6.96 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 9 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 6 ones there are 30 + 6 = 36 ones.
36 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36. Write 6 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 6 6 9 36
96 ÷ 6 = 16 - Write the answer. Include the unit.16 stickers
Check. Multiply back: 16 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 6 × 6 = 60 + 36 = 96. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Dividing by 10, 100 and 1,000
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
When you divide by 10, every digit becomes 10 times smaller. A 3 in the hundreds column (300) becomes a 3 in the tens column (30). So every digit moves one place to the right. Dividing by 100 moves every digit two places to the right, and dividing by 1,000 moves every digit three places to the right. This is the opposite of multiplying by 10, 100 or 1,000 in Chapter 4.
The decimal point does not move. It is the digits that move. When a digit moves across the point it becomes a tenth, a hundredth or a thousandth. For example 4 ones become 4 tenths, so 4 ÷ 10 = 0.4. And 4.7 ÷ 10 = 0.47, because the 4 ones become 4 tenths and the 7 tenths become 7 hundredths.
Dividing by 1,000 moves the digits three places. For example 35 ÷ 1,000 = 0.035. The ones and the tenths are empty, so we fill them with zeros. This idea is used to change units: 1 kg = 1,000 g, so to change grams into kilograms you divide by 1,000. In the same way 100 cm = 1 m and 100p = £1.
Key ideas
- Dividing by 10 moves every digit 1 place to the right; by 100, 2 places; by 1,000, 3 places.
- Fill any empty places with zeros (place holders). Write the 0 in the ones column: 0.47, not .47.
- The decimal point does not move. The digits move.
- Dividing makes a number smaller. If your answer is bigger, the digits moved the wrong way.
- To change to a bigger unit, divide: g → kg (÷ 1,000), cm → m (÷ 100), m → km (÷ 1,000), p → £ (÷ 100).
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 hundreds become 3 tens
4 tens become 4 ones - Move every digit 1 place to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.340 ÷ 10 = 34
- Write the answer. 340 ÷ 10 = 34
Check. Go back: 34 × 10 = 340 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 340 ends in 1 zero. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.6 thousands become 6 tens
5 hundreds become 5 ones - Move every digit 2 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.6,500 ÷ 100 = 65
- Write the answer. 6,500 ÷ 100 = 65
Check. Go back: 65 × 100 = 6,500 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 6,500 ends in 2 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.4 tens become 4 ones
7 ones become 7 tenths - Move every digit 1 place to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Keep the decimal point between the ones and the tenths. The point stays still, so the digits that moved across it are now in the decimal columns.47 ÷ 10 = 4.7
- Write the answer. 47 ÷ 10 = 4.7
Check. Go back: 4.7 × 10 = 47 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. The answer has a decimal point because 47 does not end in enough zeros. The point goes between the ones and the tenths.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.4 ones become 4 tenths
7 tenths become 7 hundredths - Move every digit 1 place to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.4.7 ÷ 10 = 0.47
- Write the answer. 4.7 ÷ 10 = 0.47
Check. Go back: 0.47 × 10 = 4.7 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.47, not .47.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 tens become 3 hundredths
5 ones become 5 thousandths - Move every digit 3 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones and tenths columns are empty. A zero in each is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.35 ÷ 1,000 = 0.035
- Write the answer. 35 ÷ 1,000 = 0.035
Check. Go back: 0.035 × 1,000 = 35 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.035, not .035.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the right is ÷ 10, two places is ÷ 100 and three places is ÷ 1,000.
- Compare the two numbers. Look at how the digits have moved from the start number to the answer.6.3 → 0.063
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit moved to the right, so the number got smaller.
- Say what the number is. Digits that move 2 places to the right mean ÷ 100.6.3 ÷ 100 = 0.063
Check. 6.3 ÷ 100 = 0.063. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Changing g into kg makes the number smaller (the new unit is bigger), so divide by 1,000.
- Decide what to do. 1 kg = 1,000 g, so there are 1,000 times as many g as kg. Dividing makes the number smaller.2,400 g ÷ 1,000
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.2 thousands become 2 ones
4 hundreds become 4 tenths - Move every digit 3 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.2,400 ÷ 1,000 = 2.4
- Write the answer with its unit. 2.4 kg
Check. Go back: 2.4 × 1,000 = 2,400 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Check the units: a bigger unit means a smaller number. The kg are the bigger unit.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. 100 equal parts: one for each pencil.
- Choose the operation. 100 pencils cost 3,700p, so one pencil costs the total divided by 100.3,700p ÷ 100
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 thousands become 3 tens
7 hundreds become 7 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.3,700 ÷ 100 = 37
- Write the answer. Include the unit.37p
Check. Go back: 37 × 100 = 3,700 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 3,700 ends in 2 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Watch out
Do not say “take off a zero”. That only works when the number ends in zeros: 450 ÷ 10 = 45, but 47 ÷ 10 = 4.7, not 4. Also remember dividing makes the number smaller: 6.4 ÷ 10 is 0.64, not 6.04 and not 64. The digits all move, including the 6.Exercise 5A Dividing by 10, 100 and 1,000
Non-calculatorKey words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.7 tens become 7 ones
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.70 ÷ 10 = 7
- Write the answer. 70 ÷ 10 = 7
Check. Go back: 7 × 10 = 70 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 70 ends in 1 zero. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.2 hundreds become 2 tens
5 tens become 5 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.250 ÷ 10 = 25
- Write the answer. 250 ÷ 10 = 25
Check. Go back: 25 × 10 = 250 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 250 ends in 1 zero. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.1 thousand becomes 1 hundred
3 hundreds become 3 tens - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.1,300 ÷ 10 = 130
- Write the answer. 1,300 ÷ 10 = 130
Check. Go back: 130 × 10 = 1,300 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 1,300 ends in 2 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.8 thousands become 8 hundreds
6 tens become 6 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.8,060 ÷ 10 = 806
- Write the answer. 8,060 ÷ 10 = 806
Check. Go back: 806 × 10 = 8,060 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 8,060 ends in 1 zero. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.8 hundreds become 8 ones
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.800 ÷ 100 = 8
- Write the answer. 800 ÷ 100 = 8
Check. Go back: 8 × 100 = 800 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 800 ends in 2 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.4 thousands become 4 tens
5 hundreds become 5 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.4,500 ÷ 100 = 45
- Write the answer. 4,500 ÷ 100 = 45
Check. Go back: 45 × 100 = 4,500 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 4,500 ends in 2 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 ten thousands become 3 hundreds
6 thousands become 6 tens - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.36,000 ÷ 100 = 360
- Write the answer. 36,000 ÷ 100 = 360
Check. Go back: 360 × 100 = 36,000 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 36,000 ends in 3 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.7 thousands become 7 tens
3 hundreds become 3 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.7,300 ÷ 100 = 73
- Write the answer. 7,300 ÷ 100 = 73
Check. Go back: 73 × 100 = 7,300 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 7,300 ends in 2 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.9 thousands become 9 ones
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.9,000 ÷ 1,000 = 9
- Write the answer. 9,000 ÷ 1,000 = 9
Check. Go back: 9 × 1,000 = 9,000 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 9,000 ends in 3 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.4 ten thousands become 4 tens
2 thousands become 2 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.42,000 ÷ 1,000 = 42
- Write the answer. 42,000 ÷ 1,000 = 42
Check. Go back: 42 × 1,000 = 42,000 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 42,000 ends in 3 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.6 thousands become 6 ones
5 hundreds become 5 tenths - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.6,500 ÷ 1,000 = 6.5
- Write the answer. 6,500 ÷ 1,000 = 6.5
Check. Go back: 6.5 × 1,000 = 6,500 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. The answer has a decimal point because 6,500 does not end in enough zeros. The point goes between the ones and the tenths.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.7 hundreds become 7 tenths
8 tens become 8 hundredths - Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.780 ÷ 1,000 = 0.78
- Write the answer. 780 ÷ 1,000 = 0.78
Check. Go back: 0.78 × 1,000 = 780 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.78, not .78.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.5 hundreds become 5 tens
4 tens become 4 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.540 ÷ 10 = 54
- Write the answer. 540 ÷ 10 = 54
Check. Go back: 54 × 10 = 540 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 540 ends in 1 zero. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.5 hundreds become 5 ones
4 tens become 4 tenths - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.540 ÷ 100 = 5.4
- Write the answer. 540 ÷ 100 = 5.4
Check. Go back: 5.4 × 100 = 540 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. The answer has a decimal point because 540 does not end in enough zeros. The point goes between the ones and the tenths.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.5 hundreds become 5 tenths
4 tens become 4 hundredths - Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.540 ÷ 1,000 = 0.54
- Write the answer. 540 ÷ 1,000 = 0.54
Check. Go back: 0.54 × 1,000 = 540 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.54, not .54.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.7 ones become 7 tenths
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.7 ÷ 10 = 0.7
- Write the answer. 7 ÷ 10 = 0.7
Check. Go back: 0.7 × 10 = 7 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.7, not .7.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.2 thousands become 2 tens
3 hundreds become 3 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.2,300 ÷ 100 = 23
- Write the answer. 2,300 ÷ 100 = 23
Check. Go back: 23 × 100 = 2,300 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 2,300 ends in 2 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.9 tens become 9 tenths
1 one becomes 1 hundredth - Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.91 ÷ 100 = 0.91
- Write the answer. 91 ÷ 100 = 0.91
Check. Go back: 0.91 × 100 = 91 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.91, not .91.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 ones become 3 tenths
6 tenths become 6 hundredths - Move every digit 1 place to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.3.6 ÷ 10 = 0.36
- Write the answer. 3.6 ÷ 10 = 0.36
Check. Go back: 0.36 × 10 = 3.6 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.36, not .36.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.7 tenths become 7 hundredths
- Move every digit 1 place to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones and tenths columns are empty. A zero in each is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.0.7 ÷ 10 = 0.07
- Write the answer. 0.7 ÷ 10 = 0.07
Check. Go back: 0.07 × 10 = 0.7 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.07, not .07.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.1 ten becomes 1 one
2 ones become 2 tenths
4 tenths become 4 hundredths - Keep the decimal point between the ones and the tenths. The point stays still, so the digits that moved across it are now in the decimal columns.12.4 ÷ 10 = 1.24
- Write the answer. 12.4 ÷ 10 = 1.24
Check. Go back: 1.24 × 10 = 12.4 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes the number smaller. If your answer is bigger than 12.4, the digits moved the wrong way.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.5 hundredths become 5 thousandths
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones and tenths and hundredths columns are empty. A zero in each is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.0.05 ÷ 10 = 0.005
- Write the answer. 0.05 ÷ 10 = 0.005
Check. Go back: 0.005 × 10 = 0.05 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.005, not .005.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.8 ones become 8 tenths
2 tenths become 2 hundredths
5 hundredths become 5 thousandths - Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.8.25 ÷ 10 = 0.825
- Write the answer. 8.25 ÷ 10 = 0.825
Check. Go back: 0.825 × 10 = 8.25 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.825, not .825.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.2 ones become 2 hundredths
4 tenths become 4 thousandths - Move every digit 2 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones and tenths columns are empty. A zero in each is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.2.4 ÷ 100 = 0.024
- Write the answer. 2.4 ÷ 100 = 0.024
Check. Go back: 0.024 × 100 = 2.4 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.024, not .024.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 tens become 3 tenths
8 ones become 8 hundredths - Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.38 ÷ 100 = 0.38
- Write the answer. 38 ÷ 100 = 0.38
Check. Go back: 0.38 × 100 = 38 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.38, not .38.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.7 ones become 7 hundredths
5 hundredths become 5 ten-thousandths - Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones and tenths columns are empty. A zero in each is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.7.05 ÷ 100 = 0.0705
- Write the answer. 7.05 ÷ 100 = 0.0705
Check. Go back: 0.0705 × 100 = 7.05 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.0705, not .0705.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.9 ones become 9 thousandths
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones and tenths and hundredths columns are empty. A zero in each is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.9 ÷ 1,000 = 0.009
- Write the answer. 9 ÷ 1,000 = 0.009
Check. Go back: 0.009 × 1,000 = 9 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.009, not .009.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 hundreds become 3 tenths
4 tens become 4 hundredths
7 ones become 7 thousandths
2 tenths become 2 ten-thousandths - Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.347.2 ÷ 1,000 = 0.3472
- Write the answer. 347.2 ÷ 1,000 = 0.3472
Check. Go back: 0.3472 × 1,000 = 347.2 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.3472, not .3472.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 1,000, move every digit 3 places to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.6 tens become 6 hundredths
2 ones become 2 thousandths - Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones and tenths columns are empty. A zero in each is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.62 ÷ 1,000 = 0.062
- Write the answer. 62 ÷ 1,000 = 0.062
Check. Go back: 0.062 × 1,000 = 62 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.062, not .062.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the right is ÷ 10, two places is ÷ 100 and three places is ÷ 1,000.
- Compare the two numbers. Look at how the digits have moved from the start number to the answer.4.5 → 0.045
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit moved to the right, so the number got smaller.
- Say what the number is. Digits that move 2 places to the right mean ÷ 100.4.5 ÷ 100 = 0.045
Check. 4.5 ÷ 100 = 0.045. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. Multiply the answer by 10 (move the digits 1 place to the left) to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. Multiplying undoes dividing. The missing number is 3.6 × 10.3.6 × 10
- Move the digits 1 place to the left. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger.
- Write the missing number. Read the whole sentence back to check it.36 ÷ 10 = 3.6
Check. 36 ÷ 10 = 3.6. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the right is ÷ 10, two places is ÷ 100 and three places is ÷ 1,000.
- Compare the two numbers. Look at how the digits have moved from the start number to the answer.70 → 0.07
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit moved to the right, so the number got smaller.
- Say what the number is. Digits that move 3 places to the right mean ÷ 1,000.70 ÷ 1,000 = 0.07
Check. 70 ÷ 1,000 = 0.07. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. Multiply the answer by 100 (move the digits 2 places to the left) to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. Multiplying undoes dividing. The missing number is 0.029 × 100.0.029 × 100
- Move the digits 2 places to the left. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger.
- Write the missing number. Read the whole sentence back to check it.2.9 ÷ 100 = 0.029
Check. 2.9 ÷ 100 = 0.029. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the right is ÷ 10, two places is ÷ 100 and three places is ÷ 1,000.
- Compare the two numbers. Look at how the digits have moved from the start number to the answer.63 → 6.3
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit moved to the right, so the number got smaller.
- Say what the number is. Digits that move 1 place to the right mean ÷ 10.63 ÷ 10 = 6.3
Check. 63 ÷ 10 = 6.3. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. Multiply the answer by 1,000 (move the digits 3 places to the left) to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. Multiplying undoes dividing. The missing number is 0.804 × 1,000.0.804 × 1,000
- Move the digits 3 places to the left. Multiplying by 1,000 makes each digit 1,000 times bigger.
- Write the missing number. Read the whole sentence back to check it.804 ÷ 1,000 = 0.804
Check. 804 ÷ 1,000 = 0.804. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Look at where each digit starts and where it ends. The number of places it moves tells you what you divided by.
- Read the top number and the bottom number. The top row is the starting number. The bottom row is the answer.Top: 235. Bottom: 2.35.
- Look at the arrows. Every digit moves 2 places to the right. One place is ÷ 10, two places is ÷ 100, three places is ÷ 1,000.2 places to the right means ÷ 100.
- Write the calculation. 235 ÷ 100 = 2.35
Check. Move the digits of 235 2 places to the right: 2.35. ✓
Watch out. Arrows pointing right mean the number gets smaller, so it is a division.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Look at where each digit starts and where it ends. The number of places it moves tells you what you divided by.
- Read the top number and the bottom number. The top row is the starting number. The bottom row is the answer.Top: 18. Bottom: 1.8.
- Look at the arrows. Every digit moves 1 place to the right. One place is ÷ 10, two places is ÷ 100, three places is ÷ 1,000.1 place to the right means ÷ 10.
- Write the calculation. 18 ÷ 10 = 1.8
Check. Move the digits of 18 1 place to the right: 1.8. ✓
Watch out. Arrows pointing right mean the number gets smaller, so it is a division.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Changing m into km makes the number smaller (the new unit is bigger), so divide by 1,000.
- Decide what to do. 1 km = 1,000 m, so there are 1,000 times as many m as km. Dividing makes the number smaller.3,500 m ÷ 1,000
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 thousands become 3 ones
5 hundreds become 5 tenths - Move every digit 3 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.3,500 ÷ 1,000 = 3.5
- Write the answer with its unit. 3.5 km
Check. Go back: 3.5 × 1,000 = 3,500 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Check the units: a bigger unit means a smaller number. The km are the bigger unit.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Changing cm into m makes the number smaller (the new unit is bigger), so divide by 100.
- Decide what to do. 1 m = 100 cm, so there are 100 times as many cm as m. Dividing makes the number smaller.450 cm ÷ 100
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.4 hundreds become 4 ones
5 tens become 5 tenths - Move every digit 2 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.450 ÷ 100 = 4.5
- Write the answer with its unit. 4.5 m
Check. Go back: 4.5 × 100 = 450 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Check the units: a bigger unit means a smaller number. The m are the bigger unit.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Changing g into kg makes the number smaller (the new unit is bigger), so divide by 1,000.
- Decide what to do. 1 kg = 1,000 g, so there are 1,000 times as many g as kg. Dividing makes the number smaller.2,750 g ÷ 1,000
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.2 thousands become 2 ones
7 hundreds become 7 tenths
5 tens become 5 hundredths - Move every digit 3 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.2,750 ÷ 1,000 = 2.75
- Write the answer with its unit. 2.75 kg
Check. Go back: 2.75 × 1,000 = 2,750 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Check the units: a bigger unit means a smaller number. The kg are the bigger unit.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Changing ml into litres makes the number smaller (the new unit is bigger), so divide by 1,000.
- Decide what to do. 1 litres = 1,000 ml, so there are 1,000 times as many ml as litres. Dividing makes the number smaller.825 ml ÷ 1,000
- Say what dividing by 1,000 does. Each digit becomes 1,000 times smaller, so it moves 3 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.8 hundreds become 8 tenths
2 tens become 2 hundredths
5 ones become 5 thousandths - Move every digit 3 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.825 ÷ 1,000 = 0.825
- Write the answer with its unit. 0.825 litres
Check. Go back: 0.825 × 1,000 = 825 (the digits move 3 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Check the units: a bigger unit means a smaller number. The litres are the bigger unit.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Changing pence into pounds makes the number smaller (the new unit is bigger), so divide by 100.
- Decide what to do. £1 = 100p, so there are 100 times as many pence as pounds. Dividing makes the number smaller.365p ÷ 100
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 hundreds become 3 ones
6 tens become 6 tenths
5 ones become 5 hundredths - Move every digit 2 places to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Keep the decimal point between the ones and the tenths. The point stays still, so the digits that moved across it are now in the decimal columns.365 ÷ 100 = 3.65
- Write the answer with its unit. £3.65
Check. Go back: 3.65 × 100 = 365 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Check the units: a bigger unit means a smaller number. The pounds are the bigger unit.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. 100 equal parts: one for each sticker.
- Choose the operation. 100 stickers cost 3,700p, so one sticker costs the total divided by 100.3,700p ÷ 100
- Say what dividing by 100 does. Each digit becomes 100 times smaller, so it moves 2 places to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 thousands become 3 tens
7 hundreds become 7 ones - Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.3,700 ÷ 100 = 37
- Write the answer. Include the unit.37p
Check. Go back: 37 × 100 = 3,700 (the digits move 2 places to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 3,700 ends in 2 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is one pack of 10 rolls.
- Choose the operation. The rolls go into packs of 10, so we find how many tens are in 3,000.3,000 ÷ 10
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.3 thousands become 3 hundreds
- Look at the zeros at the end. Zeros at the very end of a decimal do not change its value, so we do not write them.3,000 ÷ 10 = 300
- Write the answer. Include the unit.300 packs
Check. Go back: 300 × 10 = 3,000 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Taking off zeros works here because 3,000 ends in 3 zeros. It does not work for every number: 47 ÷ 10 is 4.7, not 4.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Work out the correct answer yourself first. Then compare it with the answer in the question to find the mistake.
- Work it out carefully. Do the question again, one step at a time.
6.4 ÷ 10 = 0.64 - Compare with the answer in the question. Noah wrote 6.04, which is not 0.64.
- Find the mistake. Noah put a zero in the tenths column and left the 6 where it was. Dividing by 10 makes every digit 10 times smaller, so the 6 must move too, and the 4 moves to the hundredths.
- Write the correct answer. The correct answer is 0.64.
Check. 0.64 × 10 = 6.4. ✓
Watch out. All the digits move. The point stays still.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.300 ÷ 100 = 3 (the 3 moves 2 places to the right)
45 ÷ 100 = 0.45 (the 4 and 5 both move 2 places)
7.5 ÷ 100 = 0.075 - Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.Dividing by 100 makes every digit 100 times smaller. A digit that is 100 times smaller is two places to the right. This is true for whole numbers and for decimals.
- Decide. Always
Check. In every example the digits moved two places to the right. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.70 ÷ 10 = 7 (a whole number)
75 ÷ 10 = 7.5 (not a whole number) - Look for one that does not work. One example that breaks the rule is called a counter-example.75 ÷ 10 = 7.5 is not a whole number.
- Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.If the number ends in 0, the digits move and the answer is a whole number. If it does not, a digit moves across the decimal point and the answer is a decimal.
- Decide. Sometimes
Check. We found one example each way. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Work out the answer to every one. The odd one out has a different answer from the others.
- Work out each one. Use place value or a known fact.
Calculation Answer 4,800 ÷ 100 48 480 ÷ 10 48 48,000 ÷ 1,000 48 4,800 ÷ 10 480 - Find the odd one out. Three have the same answer, 48. One is different.4,800 ÷ 10 = 480
- Write the answer. The odd one out is 4,800 ÷ 10.
Check. The other three all equal 48. ✓
Watch out. Work out all of them. Do not decide from just the first two.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the right is ÷ 10, two places is ÷ 100 and three places is ÷ 1,000.
- Compare the two numbers. Look at how the digits have moved from the start number to the answer.6.3 → 0.0063
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit moved to the right, so the number got smaller.
- Say what the number is. Digits that move 3 places to the right mean ÷ 1,000.6.3 ÷ 1,000 = 0.0063
Check. 6.3 ÷ 1,000 = 0.0063. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Dividing in your head
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Many divisions can be done in your head if you use facts you already know. Use a times table and place value. You know that 56 ÷ 8 = 7. 560 is 10 times bigger than 56, so 560 ÷ 8 is 10 times bigger than 7: it is 70. And 5,600 ÷ 8 = 700.
| Division | Think | Answer |
|---|---|---|
| 56 ÷ 8 | 56 ÷ 8 = 7 | 7 |
| 560 ÷ 8 | 56 tens ÷ 8 = 7 tens | 70 |
| 5,600 ÷ 8 | 56 hundreds ÷ 8 = 7 hundreds | 700 |
| 5,600 ÷ 80 | take a zero off both: 560 ÷ 8 | 70 |
Multiplication and division are inverse (opposite) operations. They undo each other. If you know 7 × 80 = 560 then you also know 80 × 7 = 560, 560 ÷ 7 = 80 and 560 ÷ 80 = 7. These four facts are a fact family. The product (560) is always the number you divide.
Halving. Dividing by 2 is halving. Dividing by 4 is halving twice, and dividing by 8 is halving three times. Dividing by 5, 20 and 25. To divide by 5, double the number and divide by 10. To divide by 20, divide by 10 and halve. To divide by 25, multiply by 4 (double, double) and divide by 100. Splitting the divisor into factors. Dividing by 12 is the same as dividing by 3 and then by 4. Chunking. Split the number into pieces your divisor goes into easily, for example 156 = 120 + 36, then divide each piece by 6.
Key ideas
- Use a fact and place value: 42 ÷ 6 = 7 so 4,200 ÷ 6 = 700 and 4,200 ÷ 60 = 70.
- Fact family: 7 × 80 = 560, 80 × 7 = 560, 560 ÷ 7 = 80, 560 ÷ 80 = 7.
- ÷ 2 halve; ÷ 4 halve twice; ÷ 8 halve three times.
- ÷ 5: double, then ÷ 10. ÷ 20: ÷ 10, then halve. ÷ 25: double, double, then ÷ 100.
- Factors: ÷ 6 is ÷ 2 then ÷ 3. ÷ 12 is ÷ 3 then ÷ 4. Chunking: split into easy multiples of the divisor.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.560 ÷ 8: the digits are 56 ÷ 8
56 ÷ 8 = 7 because 8 × 7 = 56 - Use the fact on the leading digits. 560 is 56 tens. Share 56 tens into 8 equal groups.56 tens ÷ 8 = 7 tens
7 tens = 70 - Write the answer. 560 ÷ 8 = 70
Check. Multiply back: 70 × 8 = 560. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros: 560 has 1 zero, so the answer has 1 zero after the 7.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.4,800 ÷ 80: the digits are 48 ÷ 8
48 ÷ 8 = 6 because 8 × 6 = 48 - Take 1 zero off both numbers. Dividing both numbers by 10 does not change the answer, and it makes the divisor a small number.4,800 ÷ 80 = 480 ÷ 8
- Use the fact on the leading digits. 480 is 48 tens. Share 48 tens into 8 equal groups.48 tens ÷ 8 = 6 tens
6 tens = 60 - Write the answer. 4,800 ÷ 80 = 60
Check. Multiply back: 60 × 80 = 4,800. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros carefully: 4,800 has 2 zeros and 80 has 1 zero. Take the same number off both, then put back what is left.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations. Use the multiplication fact to write the division fact.
- Look at the fact you are given. The three numbers in it are linked: two are factors and one is the product.7 × 80 = 560
- Write the division fact. Dividing undoes multiplying. 560 divided by one factor gives the other factor.560 ÷ 80 = 7
- Write the answer. The question asks for 560 ÷ 80.560 ÷ 80 = 7
Check. Multiply back: 7 × 80 = 560. ✓
Watch out. The product (560) is always the number you divide, never the number you divide by.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. A fact family has four facts that use the same three numbers: two multiplications and two divisions.
- Find the product. The product is the answer to the multiplication. It is the biggest number of the three.7 × 80 = 560
- Swap the factors. Multiplication can be done in either order, so there are two multiplication facts.7 × 80 = 560
80 × 7 = 560 - Write the two division facts. Start with the product. Divide it by each factor in turn.560 ÷ 7 = 80
560 ÷ 80 = 7
Check. Check one: 80 × 7 = 560. ✓
Watch out. The product starts both division facts. You cannot start with a factor.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 4 is the same as halving twice, because 4 = 2 × 2.
- Halve 864. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.864 = 800 + 60 + 4
half of each part: 400 + 30 + 2 = 432 - Halve 432 again. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.432 = 400 + 30 + 2
half of each part: 200 + 15 + 1 = 216 - Write the answer. 864 ÷ 4 = 216
Check. Double back: 216 × 4 = 864. ✓
Watch out. Halve twice, not once. Halving once is only ÷ 2.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. To divide by 5, double the number and then divide by 10. (5 is half of 10, so there are twice as many 5s as 10s.)
- Double the number. Doubling both numbers does not change the answer: n ÷ 5 is the same as 2n ÷ 10.345 = 300 + 40 + 5
double each part: 600 + 80 + 10 = 690 - Divide by 10. Move every digit one place to the right.690 ÷ 10 = 69
- Write the answer. 345 ÷ 5 = 69
Check. Multiply back: 69 × 5 = 345. ✓
Watch out. Double first, then divide by 10. Do not halve: that is for dividing by 20.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 20 is the same as dividing by 10 and then halving, because 20 = 10 × 2.
- Divide by 10. Move every digit one place to the right. (20 = 10 × 2.)640 ÷ 10 = 64
- Halve the answer. Now divide by the other factor, 2.64 = 60 + 4
half of each part: 30 + 2 = 32 - Write the answer. 640 ÷ 20 = 32
Check. Multiply back: 32 × 20 = 640. ✓
Watch out. Do both steps. Dividing by 10 on its own gives an answer that is twice too big.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. To divide by 25, multiply the number by 4 (double, double) and then divide by 100. (There are four 25s in 100.)
- Double the number. We multiply by 4 by doubling twice. (4 × 25 = 100.)650 = 600 + 50
double each part: 1,200 + 100 = 1,300 - Double again. Two doubles make × 4.1,300 = 1,000 + 300
double each part: 2,000 + 600 = 2,600 - Divide by 100. Multiplying both numbers by 4 does not change the answer: n ÷ 25 is the same as 4n ÷ 100. Move the digits two places to the right.2,600 ÷ 100 = 26
- Write the answer. 650 ÷ 25 = 26
Check. Multiply back: 26 × 25 = 650. ✓
Watch out. Remember there are two doubles (× 4), then divide by 100, not 10.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. 6 = 2 × 3, so dividing by 6 is the same as dividing by 2 and then by 3.
- Divide by 2. 6 = 2 × 3, so divide by 2 first.252 = 200 + 40 + 12
200 ÷ 2 = 100
40 ÷ 2 = 20
12 ÷ 2 = 6
100 + 20 + 6 = 126 - Divide the answer by 3. Now divide by the other factor.126 = 120 + 6
120 ÷ 3 = 40
6 ÷ 3 = 2
40 + 2 = 42 - Write the answer. 252 ÷ 6 = 42
Check. Multiply back: 42 × 6 = 252. ✓
Watch out. Divide the answer from step 1, not the original number again.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide (multiples of the divisor), divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split 156 into numbers that 6 divides into easily. Use multiples of 6, 60: the biggest chunk first.156 = 120 + 36
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.120 ÷ 6 = 20
36 ÷ 6 = 6 - Add the answers. The pieces of the answer add together.20 + 6 = 26
- Write the answer. 156 ÷ 6 = 26
Check. Multiply back: 26 × 6 = 156. ✓
Watch out. Check that the chunks add back to the original number.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is one pack of 25 pencils.
- Choose the operation. The pencils go into packs of 25, so we find how many 25s are in 450.450 ÷ 25
- Double the number. We multiply by 4 by doubling twice. (4 × 25 = 100.)450 = 400 + 50
double each part: 800 + 100 = 900 - Double again. Two doubles make × 4.900 = 900
double each part: 1,800 = 1,800 - Divide by 100. Multiplying both numbers by 4 does not change the answer: n ÷ 25 is the same as 4n ÷ 100. Move the digits two places to the right.1,800 ÷ 100 = 18
- Write the answer. Include the unit.18 packs
Check. Multiply back: 18 × 25 = 450. ✓
Watch out. Remember there are two doubles (× 4), then divide by 100, not 10.
Watch out
Count the zeros with care. 4,200 ÷ 60 is 70, not 700. Take the same number of zeros off both numbers (one each), then use the fact 42 ÷ 6 = 7 and put back the zero that is left. Also do not mix up the inverse facts: the product, 560, is the number you divide. 80 ÷ 560 is not the same as 560 ÷ 80.Exercise 5B Dividing in your head
Non-calculatorKey words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 9 by to get 36?9 × ? = 36
- Count up in 9s. Say the 9 times table until you reach 36.9, 18, 27, 36
- Write the division. You said 4 numbers, so 9 × 4 = 36.36 ÷ 9 = 4
Check. 4 × 9 = 36. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 36.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 8 by to get 72?8 × ? = 72
- Count up in 8s. Say the 8 times table until you reach 72.8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 72
- Write the division. You said 9 numbers, so 8 × 9 = 72.72 ÷ 8 = 9
Check. 9 × 8 = 72. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 72.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 7 by to get 63?7 × ? = 63
- Count up in 7s. Say the 7 times table until you reach 63.7, 14, 21, 28, 35, 42, 49, 56, 63
- Write the division. You said 9 numbers, so 7 × 9 = 63.63 ÷ 7 = 9
Check. 9 × 7 = 63. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 63.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 12 by to get 48?12 × ? = 48
- Count up in 12s. Say the 12 times table until you reach 48.12, 24, 36, 48
- Write the division. You said 4 numbers, so 12 × 4 = 48.48 ÷ 12 = 4
Check. 4 × 12 = 48. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 48.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 11 by to get 121?11 × ? = 121
- Count up in 11s. Say the 11 times table until you reach 121.11, 22, 33, 44, 55, 66, 77, 88, 99, 110, 121
- Write the division. You said 11 numbers, so 11 × 11 = 121.121 ÷ 11 = 11
Check. 11 × 11 = 121. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 121.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 12 by to get 132?12 × ? = 132
- Count up in 12s. Say the 12 times table until you reach 132.12, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 84, 96, 108, 120, 132
- Write the division. You said 11 numbers, so 12 × 11 = 132.132 ÷ 12 = 11
Check. 11 × 12 = 132. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 132.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 6 by to get 54?6 × ? = 54
- Count up in 6s. Say the 6 times table until you reach 54.6, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 54
- Write the division. You said 9 numbers, so 6 × 9 = 54.54 ÷ 6 = 9
Check. 9 × 6 = 54. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 54.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Use the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication.
- Think of the times table. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Ask: what do I multiply 9 by to get 81?9 × ? = 81
- Count up in 9s. Say the 9 times table until you reach 81.9, 18, 27, 36, 45, 54, 63, 72, 81
- Write the division. You said 9 numbers, so 9 × 9 = 81.81 ÷ 9 = 9
Check. 9 × 9 = 81. ✓
Watch out. Check your answer by multiplying: it should give 81.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.3,600 ÷ 9: the digits are 36 ÷ 9
36 ÷ 9 = 4 because 9 × 4 = 36 - Use the fact on the leading digits. 3,600 is 36 hundreds. Share 36 hundreds into 9 equal groups.36 hundreds ÷ 9 = 4 hundreds
4 hundreds = 400 - Write the answer. 3,600 ÷ 9 = 400
Check. Multiply back: 400 × 9 = 3,600. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros: 3,600 has 2 zeros, so the answer has 2 zeros after the 4.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.280 ÷ 7: the digits are 28 ÷ 7
28 ÷ 7 = 4 because 7 × 4 = 28 - Use the fact on the leading digits. 280 is 28 tens. Share 28 tens into 7 equal groups.28 tens ÷ 7 = 4 tens
4 tens = 40 - Write the answer. 280 ÷ 7 = 40
Check. Multiply back: 40 × 7 = 280. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros: 280 has 1 zero, so the answer has 1 zero after the 4.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.4,500 ÷ 5: the digits are 45 ÷ 5
45 ÷ 5 = 9 because 5 × 9 = 45 - Use the fact on the leading digits. 4,500 is 45 hundreds. Share 45 hundreds into 5 equal groups.45 hundreds ÷ 5 = 9 hundreds
9 hundreds = 900 - Write the answer. 4,500 ÷ 5 = 900
Check. Multiply back: 900 × 5 = 4,500. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros: 4,500 has 2 zeros, so the answer has 2 zeros after the 9.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.810 ÷ 9: the digits are 81 ÷ 9
81 ÷ 9 = 9 because 9 × 9 = 81 - Use the fact on the leading digits. 810 is 81 tens. Share 81 tens into 9 equal groups.81 tens ÷ 9 = 9 tens
9 tens = 90 - Write the answer. 810 ÷ 9 = 90
Check. Multiply back: 90 × 9 = 810. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros: 810 has 1 zero, so the answer has 1 zero after the 9.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.4,200 ÷ 60: the digits are 42 ÷ 6
42 ÷ 6 = 7 because 6 × 7 = 42 - Take 1 zero off both numbers. Dividing both numbers by 10 does not change the answer, and it makes the divisor a small number.4,200 ÷ 60 = 420 ÷ 6
- Use the fact on the leading digits. 420 is 42 tens. Share 42 tens into 6 equal groups.42 tens ÷ 6 = 7 tens
7 tens = 70 - Write the answer. 4,200 ÷ 60 = 70
Check. Multiply back: 70 × 60 = 4,200. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros carefully: 4,200 has 2 zeros and 60 has 1 zero. Take the same number off both, then put back what is left.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.3,600 ÷ 90: the digits are 36 ÷ 9
36 ÷ 9 = 4 because 9 × 4 = 36 - Take 1 zero off both numbers. Dividing both numbers by 10 does not change the answer, and it makes the divisor a small number.3,600 ÷ 90 = 360 ÷ 9
- Use the fact on the leading digits. 360 is 36 tens. Share 36 tens into 9 equal groups.36 tens ÷ 9 = 4 tens
4 tens = 40 - Write the answer. 3,600 ÷ 90 = 40
Check. Multiply back: 40 × 90 = 3,600. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros carefully: 3,600 has 2 zeros and 90 has 1 zero. Take the same number off both, then put back what is left.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.560 ÷ 70: the digits are 56 ÷ 7
56 ÷ 7 = 8 because 7 × 8 = 56 - Take 1 zero off both numbers. Dividing both numbers by 10 does not change the answer, and it makes the divisor a small number.560 ÷ 70 = 56 ÷ 7
- Use the fact. After taking the zeros away there is nothing else to put back.56 ÷ 7 = 8
- Write the answer. 560 ÷ 70 = 8
Check. Multiply back: 8 × 70 = 560. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros carefully: 560 has 1 zero and 70 has 1 zero. Take the same number off both, then put back what is left.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.8,100 ÷ 900: the digits are 81 ÷ 9
81 ÷ 9 = 9 because 9 × 9 = 81 - Take 2 zeros off both numbers. Dividing both numbers by 100 does not change the answer, and it makes the divisor a small number.8,100 ÷ 900 = 81 ÷ 9
- Use the fact. After taking the zeros away there is nothing else to put back.81 ÷ 9 = 9
- Write the answer. 8,100 ÷ 900 = 9
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 900 = 8,100. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros carefully: 8,100 has 2 zeros and 900 has 2 zeros. Take the same number off both, then put back what is left.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations. Use the multiplication fact to write the division fact.
- Look at the fact you are given. The three numbers in it are linked: two are factors and one is the product.6 × 40 = 240
- Write the division fact. Dividing undoes multiplying. 240 divided by one factor gives the other factor.240 ÷ 6 = 40
- Write the answer. The question asks for 240 ÷ 6.240 ÷ 6 = 40
Check. Multiply back: 40 × 6 = 240. ✓
Watch out. The product (240) is always the number you divide, never the number you divide by.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations. Use the multiplication fact to write the division fact.
- Look at the fact you are given. The three numbers in it are linked: two are factors and one is the product.6 × 40 = 240
- Write the division fact. Dividing undoes multiplying. 240 divided by one factor gives the other factor.240 ÷ 40 = 6
- Write the answer. The question asks for 240 ÷ 40.240 ÷ 40 = 6
Check. Multiply back: 6 × 40 = 240. ✓
Watch out. The product (240) is always the number you divide, never the number you divide by.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.2,400 ÷ 6: the digits are 24 ÷ 6
24 ÷ 6 = 4 because 6 × 4 = 24 - Use the fact on the leading digits. 2,400 is 24 hundreds. Share 24 hundreds into 6 equal groups.24 hundreds ÷ 6 = 4 hundreds
4 hundreds = 400 - Write the answer. 2,400 ÷ 6 = 400
Check. Multiply back: 400 × 6 = 2,400. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros: 2,400 has 2 zeros, so the answer has 2 zeros after the 4.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. A fact family has four facts that use the same three numbers: two multiplications and two divisions.
- Find the product. The product is the answer to the multiplication. It is the biggest number of the three.9 × 6 = 54
- Swap the factors. Multiplication can be done in either order, so there are two multiplication facts.9 × 6 = 54
6 × 9 = 54 - Write the two division facts. Start with the product. Divide it by each factor in turn.54 ÷ 9 = 6
54 ÷ 6 = 9
Check. Check one: 6 × 9 = 54. ✓
Watch out. The product starts both division facts. You cannot start with a factor.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. A fact family has four facts that use the same three numbers: two multiplications and two divisions.
- Find the product. The product is the answer to the multiplication. It is the biggest number of the three.8 × 70 = 560
- Swap the factors. Multiplication can be done in either order, so there are two multiplication facts.8 × 70 = 560
70 × 8 = 560 - Write the two division facts. Start with the product. Divide it by each factor in turn.560 ÷ 8 = 70
560 ÷ 70 = 8
Check. Check one: 70 × 8 = 560. ✓
Watch out. The product starts both division facts. You cannot start with a factor.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Division and multiplication undo each other. Use the opposite operation to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite operation. The missing number was divided by 7 to make 12. To undo the division, multiply.12 × 7
- Work it out. Use a times table fact or place value.12 × 7 = 84
Check. 84 ÷ 7 = 12. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Division and multiplication undo each other. Use the opposite operation to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite operation. The missing number was divided by 9 to make 8. To undo the division, multiply.8 × 9
- Work it out. Use a times table fact or place value.8 × 9 = 72
Check. 72 ÷ 9 = 8. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Write the matching multiplication, then use the fact family to find the missing number.
- Think about the fact family. 72 is the product. It is shared into groups of the missing size to make 9 groups.9 × ? = 72
- Divide the product by the number you know. The missing factor is the product divided by the factor we know.72 ÷ 9 = 8
Check. 72 ÷ 8 = 9. ✓
Watch out. The missing number can be the divisor: the number you divide by.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Write the matching multiplication, then use the fact family to find the missing number.
- Think about the fact family. 55 is the product. It is shared into groups of the missing size to make 11 groups.11 × ? = 55
- Divide the product by the number you know. The missing factor is the product divided by the factor we know.55 ÷ 11 = 5
Check. 55 ÷ 5 = 11. ✓
Watch out. The missing number can be the divisor: the number you divide by.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 2 is the same as halving.
- Halve 148. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.148 = 100 + 40 + 8
half of each part: 50 + 20 + 4 = 74 - Write the answer. 148 ÷ 2 = 74
Check. Double back: 74 × 2 = 148. ✓
Watch out. Halve each place-value part and add the halves back together.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 2 is the same as halving.
- Halve 356. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.356 = 300 + 50 + 6
half of each part: 150 + 25 + 3 = 178 - Write the answer. 356 ÷ 2 = 178
Check. Double back: 178 × 2 = 356. ✓
Watch out. Halve each place-value part and add the halves back together.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 2 is the same as halving.
- Halve 762. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.762 = 700 + 60 + 2
half of each part: 350 + 30 + 1 = 381 - Write the answer. 762 ÷ 2 = 381
Check. Double back: 381 × 2 = 762. ✓
Watch out. Halve each place-value part and add the halves back together.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 2 is the same as halving.
- Halve 1,584. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.1,584 = 1,000 + 500 + 80 + 4
half of each part: 500 + 250 + 40 + 2 = 792 - Write the answer. 1,584 ÷ 2 = 792
Check. Double back: 792 × 2 = 1,584. ✓
Watch out. Halve each place-value part and add the halves back together.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 4 is the same as halving twice, because 4 = 2 × 2.
- Halve 316. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.316 = 300 + 10 + 6
half of each part: 150 + 5 + 3 = 158 - Halve 158 again. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.158 = 100 + 50 + 8
half of each part: 50 + 25 + 4 = 79 - Write the answer. 316 ÷ 4 = 79
Check. Double back: 79 × 4 = 316. ✓
Watch out. Halve twice, not once. Halving once is only ÷ 2.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 4 is the same as halving twice, because 4 = 2 × 2.
- Halve 528. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.528 = 500 + 20 + 8
half of each part: 250 + 10 + 4 = 264 - Halve 264 again. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.264 = 200 + 60 + 4
half of each part: 100 + 30 + 2 = 132 - Write the answer. 528 ÷ 4 = 132
Check. Double back: 132 × 4 = 528. ✓
Watch out. Halve twice, not once. Halving once is only ÷ 2.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 8 is the same as halving three times, because 8 = 2 × 2 × 2.
- Halve 456. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.456 = 400 + 50 + 6
half of each part: 200 + 25 + 3 = 228 - Halve 228 again. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.228 = 200 + 20 + 8
half of each part: 100 + 10 + 4 = 114 - Halve 114 again. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.114 = 100 + 10 + 4
half of each part: 50 + 5 + 2 = 57 - Write the answer. 456 ÷ 8 = 57
Check. Double back: 57 × 8 = 456. ✓
Watch out. Halve three times, not once. Halving once is only ÷ 2.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 8 is the same as halving three times, because 8 = 2 × 2 × 2.
- Halve 1,208. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.1,208 = 1,000 + 200 + 8
half of each part: 500 + 100 + 4 = 604 - Halve 604 again. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.604 = 600 + 4
half of each part: 300 + 2 = 302 - Halve 302 again. Partition into place-value parts, halve each part, then add.302 = 300 + 2
half of each part: 150 + 1 = 151 - Write the answer. 1,208 ÷ 8 = 151
Check. Double back: 151 × 8 = 1,208. ✓
Watch out. Halve three times, not once. Halving once is only ÷ 2.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. To divide by 5, double the number and then divide by 10. (5 is half of 10, so there are twice as many 5s as 10s.)
- Double the number. Doubling both numbers does not change the answer: n ÷ 5 is the same as 2n ÷ 10.235 = 200 + 30 + 5
double each part: 400 + 60 + 10 = 470 - Divide by 10. Move every digit one place to the right.470 ÷ 10 = 47
- Write the answer. 235 ÷ 5 = 47
Check. Multiply back: 47 × 5 = 235. ✓
Watch out. Double first, then divide by 10. Do not halve: that is for dividing by 20.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Dividing by 20 is the same as dividing by 10 and then halving, because 20 = 10 × 2.
- Divide by 10. Move every digit one place to the right. (20 = 10 × 2.)460 ÷ 10 = 46
- Halve the answer. Now divide by the other factor, 2.46 = 40 + 6
half of each part: 20 + 3 = 23 - Write the answer. 460 ÷ 20 = 23
Check. Multiply back: 23 × 20 = 460. ✓
Watch out. Do both steps. Dividing by 10 on its own gives an answer that is twice too big.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. To divide by 25, multiply the number by 4 (double, double) and then divide by 100. (There are four 25s in 100.)
- Double the number. We multiply by 4 by doubling twice. (4 × 25 = 100.)375 = 300 + 70 + 5
double each part: 600 + 140 + 10 = 750 - Double again. Two doubles make × 4.750 = 700 + 50
double each part: 1,400 + 100 = 1,500 - Divide by 100. Multiplying both numbers by 4 does not change the answer: n ÷ 25 is the same as 4n ÷ 100. Move the digits two places to the right.1,500 ÷ 100 = 15
- Write the answer. 375 ÷ 25 = 15
Check. Multiply back: 15 × 25 = 375. ✓
Watch out. Remember there are two doubles (× 4), then divide by 100, not 10.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. To divide by 25, multiply the number by 4 (double, double) and then divide by 100. (There are four 25s in 100.)
- Double the number. We multiply by 4 by doubling twice. (4 × 25 = 100.)1,200 = 1,000 + 200
double each part: 2,000 + 400 = 2,400 - Double again. Two doubles make × 4.2,400 = 2,000 + 400
double each part: 4,000 + 800 = 4,800 - Divide by 100. Multiplying both numbers by 4 does not change the answer: n ÷ 25 is the same as 4n ÷ 100. Move the digits two places to the right.4,800 ÷ 100 = 48
- Write the answer. 1,200 ÷ 25 = 48
Check. Multiply back: 48 × 25 = 1,200. ✓
Watch out. Remember there are two doubles (× 4), then divide by 100, not 10.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. 6 = 2 × 3, so dividing by 6 is the same as dividing by 2 and then by 3.
- Divide by 2. 6 = 2 × 3, so divide by 2 first.324 = 200 + 120 + 4
200 ÷ 2 = 100
120 ÷ 2 = 60
4 ÷ 2 = 2
100 + 60 + 2 = 162 - Divide the answer by 3. Now divide by the other factor.162 = 150 + 12
150 ÷ 3 = 50
12 ÷ 3 = 4
50 + 4 = 54 - Write the answer. 324 ÷ 6 = 54
Check. Multiply back: 54 × 6 = 324. ✓
Watch out. Divide the answer from step 1, not the original number again.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. 12 = 3 × 4, so dividing by 12 is the same as dividing by 3 and then by 4.
- Divide by 3. 12 = 3 × 4, so divide by 3 first.252 = 240 + 12
240 ÷ 3 = 80
12 ÷ 3 = 4
80 + 4 = 84 - Divide the answer by 4. Now divide by the other factor.84 = 80 + 4
80 ÷ 4 = 20
4 ÷ 4 = 1
20 + 1 = 21 - Write the answer. 252 ÷ 12 = 21
Check. Multiply back: 21 × 12 = 252. ✓
Watch out. Divide the answer from step 1, not the original number again.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. 15 = 3 × 5, so dividing by 15 is the same as dividing by 3 and then by 5.
- Divide by 3. 15 = 3 × 5, so divide by 3 first.480 = 300 + 180
300 ÷ 3 = 100
180 ÷ 3 = 60
100 + 60 = 160 - Divide the answer by 5. Now divide by the other factor.160 = 150 + 10
150 ÷ 5 = 30
10 ÷ 5 = 2
30 + 2 = 32 - Write the answer. 480 ÷ 15 = 32
Check. Multiply back: 32 × 15 = 480. ✓
Watch out. Divide the answer from step 1, not the original number again.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide (multiples of the divisor), divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split 168 into numbers that 7 divides into easily. Use multiples of 7, 70: the biggest chunk first.168 = 140 + 28
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.140 ÷ 7 = 20
28 ÷ 7 = 4 - Add the answers. The pieces of the answer add together.20 + 4 = 24
- Write the answer. 168 ÷ 7 = 24
Check. Multiply back: 24 × 7 = 168. ✓
Watch out. Check that the chunks add back to the original number.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide (multiples of the divisor), divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split 1,140 into numbers that 6 divides into easily. Use multiples of 6, 60, 600: the biggest chunk first.1,140 = 600 + 540
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.600 ÷ 6 = 100
540 ÷ 6 = 90 - Add the answers. The pieces of the answer add together.100 + 90 = 190
- Write the answer. 1,140 ÷ 6 = 190
Check. Multiply back: 190 × 6 = 1,140. ✓
Watch out. Check that the chunks add back to the original number.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide (multiples of the divisor), divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split 3,150 into numbers that 5 divides into easily. Use multiples of 5, 50, 500: the biggest chunk first.3,150 = 3,000 + 150
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.3,000 ÷ 5 = 600
150 ÷ 5 = 30 - Add the answers. The pieces of the answer add together.600 + 30 = 630
- Write the answer. 3,150 ÷ 5 = 630
Check. Multiply back: 630 × 5 = 3,150. ✓
Watch out. Check that the chunks add back to the original number.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is one box of 25 cards.
- Choose the operation. The cards go into boxes of 25, so we find how many 25s are in 600.600 ÷ 25
- Double the number. We multiply by 4 by doubling twice. (4 × 25 = 100.)600 = 600
double each part: 1,200 = 1,200 - Double again. Two doubles make × 4.1,200 = 1,000 + 200
double each part: 2,000 + 400 = 2,400 - Divide by 100. Multiplying both numbers by 4 does not change the answer: n ÷ 25 is the same as 4n ÷ 100. Move the digits two places to the right.2,400 ÷ 100 = 24
- Write the answer. Include the unit.24 boxes
Check. Multiply back: 24 × 25 = 600. ✓
Watch out. Remember there are two doubles (× 4), then divide by 100, not 10.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is one bag of 20 rolls.
- Choose the operation. The rolls go into bags of 20, so we find how many 20s are in 960.960 ÷ 20
- Divide by 10. Move every digit one place to the right. (20 = 10 × 2.)960 ÷ 10 = 96
- Halve the answer. Now divide by the other factor, 2.96 = 90 + 6
half of each part: 45 + 3 = 48 - Write the answer. Include the unit.48 bags
Check. Multiply back: 48 × 20 = 960. ✓
Watch out. Do both steps. Dividing by 10 on its own gives an answer that is twice too big.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Work out the correct answer yourself first. Then compare it with the answer in the question to find the mistake.
- Work it out carefully. Do the question again, one step at a time.56 ÷ 8 = 7. But 560 is 10 times bigger than 56, so the answer is 10 times bigger.
560 ÷ 8 = 70 - Compare with the answer in the question. Ben wrote 7, which is the answer to 56 ÷ 8, not 560 ÷ 8.
- Find the mistake. Ben used the fact but forgot to put the zero back. 560 is 56 tens, so the answer is 7 tens.
- Write the correct answer. The correct answer is 70.
Check. 70 × 8 = 560. ✓
Watch out. After using a fact, put the zeros back. Check by multiplying: 7 × 8 = 56, not 560.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. To prove it, work out both ways for several numbers and compare. Then explain why it always works.
- Divide by 4 and halve twice. Work out both ways for each number.
Number Divide by 4 Halve, then halve again Same? 36 36 ÷ 4 = 9 36 ÷ 2 = 18, 18 ÷ 2 = 9 yes 72 72 ÷ 4 = 18 72 ÷ 2 = 36, 36 ÷ 2 = 18 yes 124 124 ÷ 4 = 31 124 ÷ 2 = 62, 62 ÷ 2 = 31 yes - Compare. Every row gives the same answer.All the pairs match.
- Explain why. Halving means dividing by 2. Dividing by 2 and then by 2 again is the same as dividing by 2 × 2.2 × 2 = 4, so ÷ 2 ÷ 2 is the same as ÷ 4.
Check. Try one more: 108 ÷ 4 = 27 and half of half of 108 = 27. ✓
Watch out. “Prove it” needs working AND a sentence of explanation. Examples alone are not enough.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Work out the answer to every one. The odd one out has a different answer from the others.
- Work out each one. Use place value or a known fact.
Calculation Answer 560 ÷ 8 70 490 ÷ 7 70 4,200 ÷ 60 70 3,600 ÷ 60 60 - Find the odd one out. Three have the same answer, 70. One is different.3,600 ÷ 60 = 60
- Write the answer. The odd one out is 3,600 ÷ 60.
Check. The other three all equal 70. ✓
Watch out. Work out all of them. Do not decide from just the first two.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Work backwards. Undo each step in the opposite order, using the opposite (inverse) operation.
- Write the steps in order. List what was done to the secret number.1. divide by 8
2. add 15
The answer was 40. - Work backwards with the opposite operations. Start at the end and undo each step in reverse order.take away 15: 40 − 15 = 25
multiply by 8: 25 × 8 = 200 - Write the number. The number was 200.
Check. 200 ÷ 8 = 25
25 + 15 = 40
We end at 40. ✓
Watch out. Undo the LAST step first.
Short division with exchanging
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
In Year 4 you met short division, also called the bus stop method. Here it is again with bigger numbers. We start with a picture. To work out 72 ÷ 3, share 7 tens between 3 groups: that is 2 tens each, with 1 ten left over. You cannot share a single ten, so exchange it for 10 ones. Now there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones. Share them: 4 each. So 72 ÷ 3 = 24.
The bus stop method writes down exactly the same steps. The number being divided goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside on the left. Start at the left. 7 ÷ 3 = 2 remainder 1: write 2 above the 7. The remainder 1 is a ten, and 1 ten is 10 ones, so write a small 1 in front of the 2. Now we have 12 ones: 12 ÷ 3 = 4.
| 2 | 4 | |
| 3 | 7 | 12 |
Three-digit numbers work in just the same way. Start with the hundreds, exchange any remainder for the next place (hundreds to tens, tens to ones) and carry on. If the first digit is smaller than the divisor you cannot divide it yet. In 325 ÷ 5, 3 hundreds shared into 5 groups gives 0 hundreds each. Write a 0 (it is not part of the answer) and exchange the 3 hundreds for 30 tens. Then 30 + 2 = 32 tens.
| 0 | 6 | 5 | |
| 5 | 3 | 32 | 25 |
If there is a remainder at the end, write it after the answer with an r. The remainder is always smaller than the divisor. For example, 857 ÷ 4 = 214 r 1. To check, multiply back: 214 × 4 = 856, and 856 + 1 = 857.
| 2 | 1 | 4 | r 1 | |
| 4 | 8 | 5 | 17 |
Key ideas
- Write the number inside the bus stop and the divisor outside. Start on the left, with the biggest place value.
- Divide each digit (plus any carry). Write the answer above. Exchange the remainder for the next place value: write it small in front of the next digit.
- If a digit is smaller than the divisor, write 0 above it and carry it on.
- Ignore a 0 at the very front of the answer. The final remainder is written as r and is always smaller than the divisor.
- Check by multiplying back: answer × divisor (+ remainder) = the number you started with.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 8 4 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 4 = 2
Write 2 above the 8.2 4 8 4 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 4 ones.
4 ÷ 4: 1 × 4 = 4. Write 1 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder.2 1 4 8 4 - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 1 4 8 4
84 ÷ 4 = 21 - Write the answer. 84 ÷ 4 = 21
Check. Multiply back: 21 × 4 = 20 × 4 + 1 × 4 = 80 + 4 = 84. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 6 4 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 3 = 2
Write 2 above the 6.2 3 6 4 8 - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 4 tens.
4 ÷ 3: 1 × 3 = 3, and 4 − 3 = 1. Write 1 above the 4.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit.2 1 3 6 4 18 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 3: 6 × 3 = 18. Write 6 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder.2 1 6 3 6 4 18 - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 1 6 3 6 4 18
648 ÷ 3 = 216 - Write the answer. 648 ÷ 3 = 216
Check. Multiply back: 216 × 3 = 200 × 3 + 10 × 3 + 6 × 3 = 600 + 30 + 18 = 648. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 3 2 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 5: 3 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 hundreds for 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit.0 5 3 32 5 - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 2 tens there are 30 + 2 = 32 tens.
32 ÷ 5: 6 × 5 = 30, and 32 − 30 = 2. Write 6 above the 2.
Exchange: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit.0 6 5 3 32 25 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 5 ones there are 20 + 5 = 25 ones.
25 ÷ 5: 5 × 5 = 25. Write 5 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder.0 6 5 5 3 32 25 - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 5 5 3 32 25
325 ÷ 5 = 65 - Write the answer. 325 ÷ 5 = 65
Check. Multiply back: 65 × 5 = 60 × 5 + 5 × 5 = 300 + 25 = 325. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 5, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 4 7 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 5: 4 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 tens for 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 7 ones there are 40 + 7 = 47 ones.
47 ÷ 5: 9 × 5 = 45, and 47 − 45 = 2. Write 9 above the 7.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 r 2 5 4 47
47 ÷ 5 = 9 r 2 - Write the answer. 47 ÷ 5 = 9 r 2
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 5 = 45
45 + 2 (the remainder) = 47. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 5: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 5.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 8 5 7 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 4 = 2
Write 2 above the 8. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 5 tens.
5 ÷ 4: 1 × 4 = 4, and 5 − 4 = 1. Write 1 above the 5.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 7 ones there are 10 + 7 = 17 ones.
17 ÷ 4: 4 × 4 = 16, and 17 − 16 = 1. Write 4 above the 7.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 1 4 r 1 4 8 5 17
857 ÷ 4 = 214 r 1 - Write the answer. 857 ÷ 4 = 214 r 1
Check. Multiply back: 214 × 4 = 200 × 4 + 10 × 4 + 4 × 4 = 800 + 40 + 16 = 856
856 + 1 (the remainder) = 857. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (4). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 4 3 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 7: 4 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 hundreds for 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 3 tens there are 40 + 3 = 43 tens.
43 ÷ 7: 6 × 7 = 42, and 43 − 42 = 1. Write 6 above the 3.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 6 ones there are 10 + 6 = 16 ones.
16 ÷ 7: 2 × 7 = 14, and 16 − 14 = 2. Write 2 above the 6.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 2 r 2 7 4 43 16
436 ÷ 7 = 62 r 2 - Write the answer. 436 ÷ 7 = 62 r 2
Check. Multiply back: 62 × 7 = 60 × 7 + 2 × 7 = 420 + 14 = 434
434 + 2 (the remainder) = 436. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 7: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 7.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 7 2 - Picture it with blocks. Share the tens first. Any tens left over are exchanged for ones, then the ones are shared.
- Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 3 = 2, remainder 1
Write 2 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit.2 3 7 12 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 3: 4 × 3 = 12. Write 4 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder.2 4 3 7 12 - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 4 3 7 12
72 ÷ 3 = 24 - Write the answer. 72 ÷ 3 = 24
Check. Multiply back: 24 × 3 = 20 × 3 + 4 × 3 = 60 + 12 = 72. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 6 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 138 is shared equally between 6, so divide by 6.138 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 1 3 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 3 tens there are 10 + 3 = 13 tens.
13 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12, and 13 − 12 = 1. Write 2 above the 3.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18. Write 3 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 3 6 1 13 18
138 ÷ 6 = 23 - Write the answer. Include the unit.23 stickers
Check. Multiply back: 23 × 6 = 20 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 120 + 18 = 138. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 6, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Watch out
Do not lose the remainder. In 72 ÷ 3, the 1 left over from 7 ÷ 3 is 1 ten, which is worth 10 ones. If you forget to carry it you get 2 and 4 ÷ 3 = 1, which is wrong. Also keep the answer digits in line, one above each digit of the number, and always write a 0 when a digit is too small to divide.Exercise 5C Short division with exchanging
Non-calculatorKey words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
2 6 8 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 2 = 3
Write 3 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 8 ones.
8 ÷ 2: 4 × 2 = 8. Write 4 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 4 2 6 8
68 ÷ 2 = 34 - Write the answer. 68 ÷ 2 = 34
Check. Multiply back: 34 × 2 = 30 × 2 + 4 × 2 = 60 + 8 = 68. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 9 3 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 3 = 3
Write 3 above the 9. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 3 ones.
3 ÷ 3: 1 × 3 = 3. Write 1 above the 3.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 1 3 9 3
93 ÷ 3 = 31 - Write the answer. 93 ÷ 3 = 31
Check. Multiply back: 31 × 3 = 30 × 3 + 1 × 3 = 90 + 3 = 93. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 6 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 6 = 1
Write 1 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 6: 1 × 6 = 6. Write 1 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 1 6 6 6
66 ÷ 6 = 11 - Write the answer. 66 ÷ 6 = 11
Check. Multiply back: 11 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 1 × 6 = 60 + 6 = 66. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 6 4 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 6.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 4 ones there are 20 + 4 = 24 ones.
24 ÷ 4: 6 × 4 = 24. Write 6 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 6 4 6 24
64 ÷ 4 = 16 - Write the answer. 64 ÷ 4 = 16
Check. Multiply back: 16 × 4 = 10 × 4 + 6 × 4 = 40 + 24 = 64. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 8 7 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 3 = 2, remainder 2
Write 2 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 7 ones there are 20 + 7 = 27 ones.
27 ÷ 3: 9 × 3 = 27. Write 9 above the 7.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 9 3 8 27
87 ÷ 3 = 29 - Write the answer. 87 ÷ 3 = 29
Check. Multiply back: 29 × 3 = 20 × 3 + 9 × 3 = 60 + 27 = 87. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 9 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 8 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 6 ones there are 10 + 6 = 16 ones.
16 ÷ 8: 2 × 8 = 16. Write 2 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 8 9 16
96 ÷ 8 = 12 - Write the answer. 96 ÷ 8 = 12
Check. Multiply back: 12 × 8 = 10 × 8 + 2 × 8 = 80 + 16 = 96. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 7 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 5 ones there are 20 + 5 = 25 ones.
25 ÷ 5: 5 × 5 = 25. Write 5 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 5 5 7 25
75 ÷ 5 = 15 - Write the answer. 75 ÷ 5 = 15
Check. Multiply back: 15 × 5 = 10 × 5 + 5 × 5 = 50 + 25 = 75. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 5 8 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 5.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 4: 4 × 4 = 16, and 18 − 16 = 2. Write 4 above the 8.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 r 2 4 5 18
58 ÷ 4 = 14 r 2 - Write the answer. 58 ÷ 4 = 14 r 2
Check. Multiply back: 14 × 4 = 10 × 4 + 4 × 4 = 40 + 16 = 56
56 + 2 (the remainder) = 58. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (4). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 8 3 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 3 ones there are 20 + 3 = 23 ones.
23 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18, and 23 − 18 = 5. Write 3 above the 3.
The remainder is 5. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 r 5 6 8 23
83 ÷ 6 = 13 r 5 - Write the answer. 83 ÷ 6 = 13 r 5
Check. Multiply back: 13 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 60 + 18 = 78
78 + 5 (the remainder) = 83. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (6). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 7 1 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 3 = 2, remainder 1
Write 2 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 1 ones there are 10 + 1 = 11 ones.
11 ÷ 3: 3 × 3 = 9, and 11 − 9 = 2. Write 3 above the 1.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 3 r 2 3 7 11
71 ÷ 3 = 23 r 2 - Write the answer. 71 ÷ 3 = 23 r 2
Check. Multiply back: 23 × 3 = 20 × 3 + 3 × 3 = 60 + 9 = 69
69 + 2 (the remainder) = 71. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (3). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 9 4 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 7 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 4 ones there are 20 + 4 = 24 ones.
24 ÷ 7: 3 × 7 = 21, and 24 − 21 = 3. Write 3 above the 4.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 r 3 7 9 24
94 ÷ 7 = 13 r 3 - Write the answer. 94 ÷ 7 = 13 r 3
Check. Multiply back: 13 × 7 = 10 × 7 + 3 × 7 = 70 + 21 = 91
91 + 3 (the remainder) = 94. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (7). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 9 3 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 3 = 3
Write 3 above the 9. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 3 tens.
3 ÷ 3: 1 × 3 = 3. Write 1 above the 3. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 3: 2 × 3 = 6. Write 2 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 1 2 3 9 3 6
936 ÷ 3 = 312 - Write the answer. 936 ÷ 3 = 312
Check. Multiply back: 312 × 3 = 300 × 3 + 10 × 3 + 2 × 3 = 900 + 30 + 6 = 936. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 7 2 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 2 tens there are 20 + 2 = 22 tens.
22 ÷ 5: 4 × 5 = 20, and 22 − 20 = 2. Write 4 above the 2.
Exchange: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 5 ones there are 20 + 5 = 25 ones.
25 ÷ 5: 5 × 5 = 25. Write 5 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 5 5 7 22 25
725 ÷ 5 = 145 - Write the answer. 725 ÷ 5 = 145
Check. Multiply back: 145 × 5 = 100 × 5 + 40 × 5 + 5 × 5 = 500 + 200 + 25 = 725. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 6 1 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 7: 6 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 6 hundreds for 60 tens. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 tens. With the 1 tens there are 60 + 1 = 61 tens.
61 ÷ 7: 8 × 7 = 56, and 61 − 56 = 5. Write 8 above the 1.
Exchange: 5 tens become 50 ones. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 6 ones there are 50 + 6 = 56 ones.
56 ÷ 7: 8 × 7 = 56. Write 8 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 8 7 6 61 56
616 ÷ 7 = 88 - Write the answer. 616 ÷ 7 = 88
Check. Multiply back: 88 × 7 = 80 × 7 + 8 × 7 = 560 + 56 = 616. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 7, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 4 5 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 6: 4 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 hundreds for 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 5 tens there are 40 + 5 = 45 tens.
45 ÷ 6: 7 × 6 = 42, and 45 − 42 = 3. Write 7 above the 5.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 6 ones there are 30 + 6 = 36 ones.
36 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36. Write 6 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 6 6 4 45 36
456 ÷ 6 = 76 - Write the answer. 456 ÷ 6 = 76
Check. Multiply back: 76 × 6 = 70 × 6 + 6 × 6 = 420 + 36 = 456. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 6, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 6 7 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 8: 6 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 6 hundreds for 60 tens. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 tens. With the 7 tens there are 60 + 7 = 67 tens.
67 ÷ 8: 8 × 8 = 64, and 67 − 64 = 3. Write 8 above the 7.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 2 ones there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones.
32 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32. Write 4 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 4 8 6 67 32
672 ÷ 8 = 84 - Write the answer. 672 ÷ 8 = 84
Check. Multiply back: 84 × 8 = 80 × 8 + 4 × 8 = 640 + 32 = 672. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 8, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 7 3 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 3 tens there are 20 + 3 = 23 tens.
23 ÷ 5: 4 × 5 = 20, and 23 − 20 = 3. Write 4 above the 3.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 5: 7 × 5 = 35. Write 7 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 7 5 7 23 35
735 ÷ 5 = 147 - Write the answer. 735 ÷ 5 = 147
Check. Multiply back: 147 × 5 = 100 × 5 + 40 × 5 + 7 × 5 = 500 + 200 + 35 = 735. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 6 2 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 6.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 2 tens there are 20 + 2 = 22 tens.
22 ÷ 4: 5 × 4 = 20, and 22 − 20 = 2. Write 5 above the 2.
Exchange: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 5 ones there are 20 + 5 = 25 ones.
25 ÷ 4: 6 × 4 = 24, and 25 − 24 = 1. Write 6 above the 5.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 5 6 r 1 4 6 22 25
625 ÷ 4 = 156 r 1 - Write the answer. 625 ÷ 4 = 156 r 1
Check. Multiply back: 156 × 4 = 100 × 4 + 50 × 4 + 6 × 4 = 400 + 200 + 24 = 624
624 + 1 (the remainder) = 625. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (4). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 8 7 4 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 7 tens there are 20 + 7 = 27 tens.
27 ÷ 6: 4 × 6 = 24, and 27 − 24 = 3. Write 4 above the 7.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 4 ones there are 30 + 4 = 34 ones.
34 ÷ 6: 5 × 6 = 30, and 34 − 30 = 4. Write 5 above the 4.
The remainder is 4. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 5 r 4 6 8 27 34
874 ÷ 6 = 145 r 4 - Write the answer. 874 ÷ 6 = 145 r 4
Check. Multiply back: 145 × 6 = 100 × 6 + 40 × 6 + 5 × 6 = 600 + 240 + 30 = 870
870 + 4 (the remainder) = 874. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (6). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 5 9 3 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 7: 5 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 hundreds for 50 tens. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 tens. With the 9 tens there are 50 + 9 = 59 tens.
59 ÷ 7: 8 × 7 = 56, and 59 − 56 = 3. Write 8 above the 9.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 3 ones there are 30 + 3 = 33 ones.
33 ÷ 7: 4 × 7 = 28, and 33 − 28 = 5. Write 4 above the 3.
The remainder is 5. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 4 r 5 7 5 59 33
593 ÷ 7 = 84 r 5 - Write the answer. 593 ÷ 7 = 84 r 5
Check. Multiply back: 84 × 7 = 80 × 7 + 4 × 7 = 560 + 28 = 588
588 + 5 (the remainder) = 593. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 7: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 7.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 9 9 9 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 8 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 9 tens there are 10 + 9 = 19 tens.
19 ÷ 8: 2 × 8 = 16, and 19 − 16 = 3. Write 2 above the 9.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 9 ones there are 30 + 9 = 39 ones.
39 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32, and 39 − 32 = 7. Write 4 above the 9.
The remainder is 7. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 4 r 7 8 9 19 39
999 ÷ 8 = 124 r 7 - Write the answer. 999 ÷ 8 = 124 r 7
Check. Multiply back: 124 × 8 = 100 × 8 + 20 × 8 + 4 × 8 = 800 + 160 + 32 = 992
992 + 7 (the remainder) = 999. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (8). If it is not, you can divide again.
| 0 | |||
| 6 | 5 | 53 | 4 |
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. The 5 hundreds are too few to share between 6, so they were exchanged for 50 tens. Add them to the 3 tens that are there.
- Use the carried 5. The small 5 in front of the 3 means 5 hundreds became 50 tens. With the 3 tens there are 50 + 3 = 53 tens.50 + 3 = 53 tens
- Divide. Use the 6 times table.53 ÷ 6 = 8 remainder 5, because 8 × 6 = 48 and 53 − 48 = 5
Write 8 above the 3.0 8 6 5 53 54
Check. 8 × 6 = 48. ✓
Watch out. The carried digit is added to the digit it is in front of, as tens.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. The remainder from the last step is carried to the next digit.
- Find the remainder. From the last step: 53 ÷ 6 = 8 remainder 5.53 − 48 = 5
- Carry the remainder. 5 tens are exchanged for 50 ones, so the 5 is written small in front of the 4 in the ones place.
0 8 6 5 53 54
Check. The ones column now has 50 + 4 = 54 ones.
Watch out. The carried number is the remainder.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 5 3 4 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 6: 5 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 hundreds for 50 tens. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 tens. With the 3 tens there are 50 + 3 = 53 tens.
53 ÷ 6: 8 × 6 = 48, and 53 − 48 = 5. Write 8 above the 3.
Exchange: 5 tens become 50 ones. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 4 ones there are 50 + 4 = 54 ones.
54 ÷ 6: 9 × 6 = 54. Write 9 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 9 6 5 53 54
534 ÷ 6 = 89 - Write the answer. 534 ÷ 6 = 89
Check. Multiply back: 89 × 6 = 80 × 6 + 9 × 6 = 480 + 54 = 534. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 6, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Count what is in each group.
- Count the tens rods in one group. Look at one group and count the green rods.2 tens
- Count the ones. Count the small red squares in one group. These came from the exchange.3 ones
- Read the number in each group. 2 tens and 3 ones make 23.23
Check. 23 × 4 = 92.
Watch out. Count carefully: each group is the same.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Look at the orange squares outside the groups.
- Count the left-over ones. They are not in any group.2 left over
- Write the division. 94 ÷ 4 = 23 remainder 294 ÷ 4 = 23 r 2
Check. 23 × 4 = 92, and 92 + 2 = 94. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is smaller than 4.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Look at the orange squares outside the groups.
- Count the left-over ones. They are not in any group.2 left over
- Write the division. 94 ÷ 4 = 23 remainder 294 ÷ 4 = 23 r 2
Check. 23 × 4 = 92, and 92 + 2 = 94. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is smaller than 4.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 6 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 138 is shared equally between 6, so divide by 6.138 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 1 3 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 3 tens there are 10 + 3 = 13 tens.
13 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12, and 13 − 12 = 1. Write 2 above the 3.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18. Write 3 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 3 6 1 13 18
138 ÷ 6 = 23 - Write the answer. Include the unit.23 stickers
Check. Multiply back: 23 × 6 = 20 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 120 + 18 = 138. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 6, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is a group of 5. We count how many boxes make 375.
- Choose the operation. We find how many groups of 5 fit into 375, so divide by 5.375 ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 3 7 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 5: 3 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 hundreds for 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 7 tens there are 30 + 7 = 37 tens.
37 ÷ 5: 7 × 5 = 35, and 37 − 35 = 2. Write 7 above the 7.
Exchange: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 5 ones there are 20 + 5 = 25 ones.
25 ÷ 5: 5 × 5 = 25. Write 5 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 5 5 3 37 25
375 ÷ 5 = 75 - Write the answer. Include the unit.75 bags
Check. Multiply back: 75 × 5 = 70 × 5 + 5 × 5 = 350 + 25 = 375. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 5, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 8 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 432 is shared equally between 8, so divide by 8.432 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 4 3 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 8: 4 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 hundreds for 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 3 tens there are 40 + 3 = 43 tens.
43 ÷ 8: 5 × 8 = 40, and 43 − 40 = 3. Write 5 above the 3.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 2 ones there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones.
32 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32. Write 4 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 5 4 8 4 43 32
432 ÷ 8 = 54 - Write the answer. Include the unit.54 chairs
Check. Multiply back: 54 × 8 = 50 × 8 + 4 × 8 = 400 + 32 = 432. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 8, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. A bar model is a drawing that shows the amounts in a problem as bars, so you can see which calculation to do.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. There are 3 boxes of 84, which is shared into 9 equal parts.
- Find the number of pencils. There are 3 boxes of 84 pencils. Multiply.84 × 3 = 252
- Share the pencils. The pencils are shared equally between 9 classes, so divide by 9.252 ÷ 9 = 28
- Write the answer. Include the unit.28 pencils
Check. 28 × 9 = 252. ✓
Watch out. Do the multiplication first to find the total, then divide.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Choose the operation. Share the stickers equally between 7 children, so divide by 7.437 ÷ 7
- Use short division. Divide one digit at a time.
0 6 2 r 3 7 4 43 17
437 ÷ 7 = 62 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. Each child gets the whole number part. The remainder is what is left over after sharing.Each child gets 62. There are 3 left over.
- Write the answer. Include the unit.62 stickers each and 3 left over
Check. 62 × 7 = 434, and 434 + 3 = 437. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is smaller than 7.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Choose the operation. Share the stickers equally between 7 children, so divide by 7.437 ÷ 7
- Use short division. Divide one digit at a time.
0 6 2 r 3 7 4 43 17
437 ÷ 7 = 62 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. Each child gets the whole number part. The remainder is what is left over after sharing.Each child gets 62. There are 3 left over.
- Write the answer. Include the unit.62 stickers each and 3 left over
Check. 62 × 7 = 434, and 434 + 3 = 437. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is smaller than 7.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Work out the correct answer yourself first. Then compare it with the answer in the question to find the mistake.
- Work it out carefully. Do the question again, one step at a time.
1 2 3 6 7 13 18
738 ÷ 6 = 123 - Compare with the answer in the question. Jack wrote 101, which is not 123, so Jack made a mistake.
- Find the mistake. Jack did not carry the remainder. Look at the tens column: the carried 1 should have been added to make 13.
- Write the correct answer. The correct answer is 123.
Check. Multiply back: 123 × 6 = 100 × 6 + 20 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 600 + 120 + 18 = 738. ✓
Watch out. After each digit, carry the remainder to the next digit. Do not lose it.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.Divide by 6 and look at the remainders: 13 ÷ 6 = 2 r 1, 17 ÷ 6 = 2 r 5, 18 ÷ 6 = 3 r 0. They are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
- Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.If the remainder was 6, there would be another whole group of 6 in it, so we could divide again. A remainder is always smaller than the divisor.
- Decide. Never
Check. We never found a remainder of 6. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.100 ÷ 2 = 50 (2 digits)
200 ÷ 2 = 100 (3 digits) - Look for one that does not work. One example that breaks the rule is called a counter-example.200 ÷ 2 = 100 has 3 digits.
- Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.Half of 100 to 199 is 50 to 99 (2 digits), but half of 200 or more is 100 or more (3 digits). It depends on the number.
- Decide. Sometimes
Check. We found one example each way. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Work out the answer to every one. The odd one out has a different answer from the others.
- Work out each one. Use place value or a known fact.
Calculation Answer 47 ÷ 5 remainder 2 62 ÷ 5 remainder 2 37 ÷ 5 remainder 2 33 ÷ 5 remainder 3 - Find the odd one out. Three have the same answer, remainder 2. One is different.33 ÷ 5 = remainder 3
- Write the answer. The odd one out is 33 ÷ 5.
Check. The other three all equal remainder 2. ✓
Watch out. Work out all of them. Do not decide from just the first two.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Try each digit in the box. Only one makes the number divide by 7 with no remainder.
- Try each digit. Divide each number by 7 and look at the remainder.
Digit Number Division No remainder? 0 304 304 ÷ 7 = 43 r 3 no 1 314 314 ÷ 7 = 44 r 6 no 2 324 324 ÷ 7 = 46 r 2 no 3 334 334 ÷ 7 = 47 r 5 no 4 344 344 ÷ 7 = 49 r 1 no 5 354 354 ÷ 7 = 50 r 4 no 6 364 364 ÷ 7 = 52 yes 7 374 374 ÷ 7 = 53 r 3 no 8 384 384 ÷ 7 = 54 r 6 no 9 394 394 ÷ 7 = 56 r 2 no - Pick the digit. Only one row has no remainder.The digit is 6.
Check. 364 ÷ 7 = 52. ✓
Watch out. Put your digit back in the box and divide to check there is no remainder.
Bigger numbers, zeros, estimating and checking
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Now we divide numbers with up to 4 digits. The method is exactly the same as before. There are just more digits to work through: thousands, then hundreds, then tens, then ones. When the first digit is smaller than the divisor, write 0 above it, exchange it for 10 times as many of the next place, and carry on.
| 0 | 6 | 8 | 4 | |
| 4 | 2 | 27 | 33 | 16 |
Zeros need care. A 0 in the number you are dividing still gets a step. If nothing was carried, 0 ÷ 4 = 0, so write 0 above it. A 0 in the answer is a place holder: it keeps the other digits in the right columns. Without it, 1,014 would look like 114. A zero also appears when a digit plus the carry is smaller than the divisor.
| 1 | 0 | 1 | 4 | |
| 4 | 4 | 0 | 5 | 16 |
| 0 | 6 | 0 | 1 | |
| 5 | 3 | 30 | 0 | 5 |
Estimate first, then check. Before you divide, round the number to something your divisor goes into easily. For 5,736 ÷ 7: 5,736 is about 5,600, and 56 ÷ 7 = 8, so 5,600 ÷ 7 = 800. The exact answer should be close to 800. Afterwards, check by multiplying back: the answer × the divisor (plus any remainder) must give the number you started with.
| Step | Working |
|---|---|
| Estimate | 5,736 ≈ 5,600 and 5,600 ÷ 7 = 800 |
| Divide | 5,736 ÷ 7 = 819 r 3 |
| Check by multiplying | 819 × 7 = 5,733 and 5,733 + 3 = 5,736 |
Key ideas
- Use the same bus stop method. Start with the thousands. If the first digit is smaller than the divisor, write 0 and carry it on.
- A 0 in the number still needs a step. A 0 in the answer is a place holder: never leave it out.
- Estimate first: round to a number the divisor goes into easily, then divide. The exact answer should be close.
- Check by multiplying back: answer × divisor (+ remainder) = the number you started with.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 2 7 3 6 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 4: 2 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 thousands for 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit.0 4 2 27 3 6 - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 7 hundreds there are 20 + 7 = 27 hundreds.
27 ÷ 4: 6 × 4 = 24, and 27 − 24 = 3. Write 6 above the 7.
Exchange: 3 hundreds become 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit.0 6 4 2 27 33 6 - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 3 tens there are 30 + 3 = 33 tens.
33 ÷ 4: 8 × 4 = 32, and 33 − 32 = 1. Write 8 above the 3.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit.0 6 8 4 2 27 33 16 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 6 ones there are 10 + 6 = 16 ones.
16 ÷ 4: 4 × 4 = 16. Write 4 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder.0 6 8 4 4 2 27 33 16 - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 8 4 4 2 27 33 16
2,736 ÷ 4 = 684 - Write the answer. 2,736 ÷ 4 = 684
Check. Multiply back: 684 × 4 = 600 × 4 + 80 × 4 + 4 × 4 = 2,400 + 320 + 16 = 2,736. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 4, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 5 4 1 8 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 6: 5 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 thousands for 50 hundreds. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 hundreds. With the 4 hundreds there are 50 + 4 = 54 hundreds.
54 ÷ 6: 9 × 6 = 54. Write 9 above the 4. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 1 tens.
1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so write 0.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18. Write 3 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 0 3 6 5 54 1 18
5,418 ÷ 6 = 903 - Write the answer. 5,418 ÷ 6 = 903
Check. Multiply back: 903 × 6 = 900 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 5,400 + 18 = 5,418. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 903 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 4 0 5 6 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 4 = 1
Write 1 above the 4.1 4 4 0 5 6 - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 hundreds.
0 ÷ 4 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.1 0 4 4 0 5 6 - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 5 tens.
5 ÷ 4: 1 × 4 = 4, and 5 − 4 = 1. Write 1 above the 5.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit.1 0 1 4 4 0 5 16 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 6 ones there are 10 + 6 = 16 ones.
16 ÷ 4: 4 × 4 = 16. Write 4 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder.1 0 1 4 4 4 0 5 16 - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 1 4 4 4 0 5 16
4,056 ÷ 4 = 1,014 - Write the answer. 4,056 ÷ 4 = 1,014
Check. Multiply back: 1,014 × 4 = 1,000 × 4 + 10 × 4 + 4 × 4 = 4,000 + 40 + 16 = 4,056. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 1,014 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 3 0 0 5 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 5: 3 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 thousands for 30 hundreds. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 hundreds. With the 0 hundreds there are 30 + 0 = 30 hundreds.
30 ÷ 5: 6 × 5 = 30. Write 6 above the 0. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 5 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 5 ones.
5 ÷ 5: 1 × 5 = 5. Write 1 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 0 1 5 3 30 0 5
3,005 ÷ 5 = 601 - Write the answer. 3,005 ÷ 5 = 601
Check. Multiply back: 601 × 5 = 600 × 5 + 1 × 5 = 3,000 + 5 = 3,005. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 601 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 5 7 4 3 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 7: 5 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 thousands for 50 hundreds. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 hundreds. With the 7 hundreds there are 50 + 7 = 57 hundreds.
57 ÷ 7: 8 × 7 = 56, and 57 − 56 = 1. Write 8 above the 7.
Exchange: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 4 tens there are 10 + 4 = 14 tens.
14 ÷ 7: 2 × 7 = 14. Write 2 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 3 ones.
3 ÷ 7: 3 is smaller than 7, so write 0.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 2 0 r 3 7 5 57 14 3
5,743 ÷ 7 = 820 r 3 - Write the answer. 5,743 ÷ 7 = 820 r 3
Check. Multiply back: 820 × 7 = 800 × 7 + 20 × 7 = 5,600 + 140 = 5,740
5,740 + 3 (the remainder) = 5,743. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 820 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 8 7 6 5 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 9: 8 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 8 thousands for 80 hundreds. Carry 8 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 8 that was carried.The carried 8 makes 80 hundreds. With the 7 hundreds there are 80 + 7 = 87 hundreds.
87 ÷ 9: 9 × 9 = 81, and 87 − 81 = 6. Write 9 above the 7.
Exchange: 6 hundreds become 60 tens. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 tens. With the 6 tens there are 60 + 6 = 66 tens.
66 ÷ 9: 7 × 9 = 63, and 66 − 63 = 3. Write 7 above the 6.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 9: 3 × 9 = 27, and 35 − 27 = 8. Write 3 above the 5.
The remainder is 8. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 7 3 r 8 9 8 87 66 35
8,765 ÷ 9 = 973 r 8 - Write the answer. 8,765 ÷ 9 = 973 r 8
Check. Multiply back: 973 × 9 = 900 × 9 + 70 × 9 + 3 × 9 = 8,100 + 630 + 27 = 8,757
8,757 + 8 (the remainder) = 8,765. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 9: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 9.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Estimate first by rounding. Then use short division, and compare the answer with your estimate.
- Estimate first. Round 5,736 to a number that 7 divides into easily. This tells us roughly what the answer should be.5,736 ≈ 5,600, so 5,600 ÷ 7 = 800
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 5 7 3 6 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 7: 5 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 thousands for 50 hundreds. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 hundreds. With the 7 hundreds there are 50 + 7 = 57 hundreds.
57 ÷ 7: 8 × 7 = 56, and 57 − 56 = 1. Write 8 above the 7.
Exchange: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 3 tens there are 10 + 3 = 13 tens.
13 ÷ 7: 1 × 7 = 7, and 13 − 7 = 6. Write 1 above the 3.
Exchange: 6 tens become 60 ones. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 ones. With the 6 ones there are 60 + 6 = 66 ones.
66 ÷ 7: 9 × 7 = 63, and 66 − 63 = 3. Write 9 above the 6.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 1 9 r 3 7 5 57 13 66
5,736 ÷ 7 = 819 r 3 - Compare the answer with the estimate. They should be close.819 r 3 is close to 800. ✓
- Write the answer. 819 r 3
Check. Estimate: 5,736 ≈ 5,600, and 5,600 ÷ 7 = 800. The answer 819 is close to 800. ✓
Watch out. If your answer is nowhere near the estimate, check your carries and your zeros.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. Use the inverse operation. Multiply your answer by the divisor (and add any remainder). You should get back the number you started with.
- Multiply the answer by the number you divided by. Multiplying is the inverse (opposite) of dividing, so it should take us back to the start.365 × 6 = 300 × 6 + 60 × 6 + 5 × 6 = 1,800 + 360 + 30 = 2,190
- Compare with 2,184. If 365 is right, we get back to exactly 2,184.2,190 ≠ 2,184
- Decide. We did not get back to 2,184, so Priya’s answer is not right.No. The correct answer is 364.
- Find the correct answer. Use short division.
0 3 6 4 6 2 21 38 24
2,184 ÷ 6 = 364
Check. The check itself: 365 groups of 6 is 2,190.
Watch out. Do not forget to add the remainder when you multiply back.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 7 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 2,450 is shared equally between 7, so divide by 7.2,450 ÷ 7
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 2 4 5 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 7: 2 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 thousands for 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 4 hundreds there are 20 + 4 = 24 hundreds.
24 ÷ 7: 3 × 7 = 21, and 24 − 21 = 3. Write 3 above the 4.
Exchange: 3 hundreds become 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 5 tens there are 30 + 5 = 35 tens.
35 ÷ 7: 5 × 7 = 35. Write 5 above the 5. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 7 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 3 5 0 7 2 24 35 0
2,450 ÷ 7 = 350 - Write the answer. Include the unit.350 books
Check. Multiply back: 350 × 7 = 300 × 7 + 50 × 7 = 2,100 + 350 = 2,450. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 350 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Watch out
Do not leave out a zero. In 4,056 ÷ 4 the answer is 1,014. If you write 114 the answer is far too small (the estimate 4,000 ÷ 4 = 1,000 shows this). Also remember to add the carry after the 0 hundreds: 0 hundreds and a carry of 0 gives 0, but a carry of 1 would give 10.Exercise 5D Four-digit numbers and zeros
Non-calculatorKey words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 4 3 6 8 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 3 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 4.
Exchange the remainder: 1 thousand becomes 10 hundreds. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 hundreds. With the 3 hundreds there are 10 + 3 = 13 hundreds.
13 ÷ 3: 4 × 3 = 12, and 13 − 12 = 1. Write 4 above the 3.
Exchange: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 6 tens there are 10 + 6 = 16 tens.
16 ÷ 3: 5 × 3 = 15, and 16 − 15 = 1. Write 5 above the 6.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 3: 6 × 3 = 18. Write 6 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 5 6 3 4 13 16 18
4,368 ÷ 3 = 1,456 - Write the answer. 4,368 ÷ 3 = 1,456
Check. Multiply back: 1,456 × 3 = 1,000 × 3 + 400 × 3 + 50 × 3 + 6 × 3 = 3,000 + 1,200 + 150 + 18 = 4,368. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 7 2 4 5 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 2 thousands become 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 2 hundreds there are 20 + 2 = 22 hundreds.
22 ÷ 5: 4 × 5 = 20, and 22 − 20 = 2. Write 4 above the 2.
Exchange: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 4 tens there are 20 + 4 = 24 tens.
24 ÷ 5: 4 × 5 = 20, and 24 − 20 = 4. Write 4 above the 4.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 5 ones there are 40 + 5 = 45 ones.
45 ÷ 5: 9 × 5 = 45. Write 9 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 4 9 5 7 22 24 45
7,245 ÷ 5 = 1,449 - Write the answer. 7,245 ÷ 5 = 1,449
Check. Multiply back: 1,449 × 5 = 1,000 × 5 + 400 × 5 + 40 × 5 + 9 × 5 = 5,000 + 2,000 + 200 + 45 = 7,245. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 8 2 7 4 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 2 thousands become 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 2 hundreds there are 20 + 2 = 22 hundreds.
22 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18, and 22 − 18 = 4. Write 3 above the 2.
Exchange: 4 hundreds become 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 7 tens there are 40 + 7 = 47 tens.
47 ÷ 6: 7 × 6 = 42, and 47 − 42 = 5. Write 7 above the 7.
Exchange: 5 tens become 50 ones. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 4 ones there are 50 + 4 = 54 ones.
54 ÷ 6: 9 × 6 = 54. Write 9 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 7 9 6 8 22 47 54
8,274 ÷ 6 = 1,379 - Write the answer. 8,274 ÷ 6 = 1,379
Check. Multiply back: 1,379 × 6 = 1,000 × 6 + 300 × 6 + 70 × 6 + 9 × 6 = 6,000 + 1,800 + 420 + 54 = 8,274. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 2 0 1 6 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 4: 2 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 thousands for 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 0 hundreds there are 20 + 0 = 20 hundreds.
20 ÷ 4: 5 × 4 = 20. Write 5 above the 0. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 1 tens.
1 ÷ 4: 1 is smaller than 4, so write 0.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 6 ones there are 10 + 6 = 16 ones.
16 ÷ 4: 4 × 4 = 16. Write 4 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 5 0 4 4 2 20 1 16
2,016 ÷ 4 = 504 - Write the answer. 2,016 ÷ 4 = 504
Check. Multiply back: 504 × 4 = 500 × 4 + 4 × 4 = 2,000 + 16 = 2,016. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 504 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 3 0 6 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 5: 3 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 thousands for 30 hundreds. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 hundreds. With the 0 hundreds there are 30 + 0 = 30 hundreds.
30 ÷ 5: 6 × 5 = 30. Write 6 above the 0. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 tens.
6 ÷ 5: 1 × 5 = 5, and 6 − 5 = 1. Write 1 above the 6.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 0 ones there are 10 + 0 = 10 ones.
10 ÷ 5: 2 × 5 = 10. Write 2 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 1 2 5 3 30 6 10
3,060 ÷ 5 = 612 - Write the answer. 3,060 ÷ 5 = 612
Check. Multiply back: 612 × 5 = 600 × 5 + 10 × 5 + 2 × 5 = 3,000 + 50 + 10 = 3,060. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 5, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 9 0 4 5 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 9 = 1
Write 1 above the 9. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 hundreds.
0 ÷ 9 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 4 tens.
4 ÷ 9: 4 is smaller than 9, so write 0.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 5 ones there are 40 + 5 = 45 ones.
45 ÷ 9: 5 × 9 = 45. Write 5 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 0 5 9 9 0 4 45
9,045 ÷ 9 = 1,005 - Write the answer. 9,045 ÷ 9 = 1,005
Check. Multiply back: 1,005 × 9 = 1,000 × 9 + 5 × 9 = 9,000 + 45 = 9,045. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 1,005 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 6 3 1 4 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 7: 6 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 6 thousands for 60 hundreds. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 hundreds. With the 3 hundreds there are 60 + 3 = 63 hundreds.
63 ÷ 7: 9 × 7 = 63. Write 9 above the 3. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 1 tens.
1 ÷ 7: 1 is smaller than 7, so write 0.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 4 ones there are 10 + 4 = 14 ones.
14 ÷ 7: 2 × 7 = 14. Write 2 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 0 2 7 6 63 1 14
6,314 ÷ 7 = 902 - Write the answer. 6,314 ÷ 7 = 902
Check. Multiply back: 902 × 7 = 900 × 7 + 2 × 7 = 6,300 + 14 = 6,314. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 902 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 8 2 4 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 4 = 2
Write 2 above the 8. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 2 hundreds.
2 ÷ 4: 2 is smaller than 4, so write 0.
Exchange: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 4 tens there are 20 + 4 = 24 tens.
24 ÷ 4: 6 × 4 = 24. Write 6 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 4 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 0 6 0 4 8 2 24 0
8,240 ÷ 4 = 2,060 - Write the answer. 8,240 ÷ 4 = 2,060
Check. Multiply back: 2,060 × 4 = 2,000 × 4 + 60 × 4 = 8,000 + 240 = 8,240. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 2,060 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 5 4 0 6 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 6: 5 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 thousands for 50 hundreds. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 hundreds. With the 4 hundreds there are 50 + 4 = 54 hundreds.
54 ÷ 6: 9 × 6 = 54. Write 9 above the 4. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 6 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 6: 1 × 6 = 6. Write 1 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 0 1 6 5 54 0 6
5,406 ÷ 6 = 901 - Write the answer. 5,406 ÷ 6 = 901
Check. Multiply back: 901 × 6 = 900 × 6 + 1 × 6 = 5,400 + 6 = 5,406. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 901 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 4 0 0 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 5: 4 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 thousands for 40 hundreds. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 hundreds. With the 0 hundreds there are 40 + 0 = 40 hundreds.
40 ÷ 5: 8 × 5 = 40. Write 8 above the 0. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 5 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 5 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 0 0 5 4 40 0 0
4,000 ÷ 5 = 800 - Write the answer. 4,000 ÷ 5 = 800
Check. Multiply back: 800 × 5 = 4,000. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 800 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 6 3 0 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 9: 6 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 6 thousands for 60 hundreds. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 hundreds. With the 3 hundreds there are 60 + 3 = 63 hundreds.
63 ÷ 9: 7 × 9 = 63. Write 7 above the 3. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 9 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 9 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 0 0 9 6 63 0 0
6,300 ÷ 9 = 700 - Write the answer. 6,300 ÷ 9 = 700
Check. Multiply back: 700 × 9 = 6,300. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 700 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 9 0 0 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 3 = 3
Write 3 above the 9. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 hundreds.
0 ÷ 3 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 3 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 3 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 0 0 0 3 9 0 0 0
9,000 ÷ 3 = 3,000 - Write the answer. 9,000 ÷ 3 = 3,000
Check. Multiply back: 3,000 × 3 = 9,000. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 3,000 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 8 0 0 8 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 8 = 1
Write 1 above the 8. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 hundreds.
0 ÷ 8 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 8 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 8 ones.
8 ÷ 8: 1 × 8 = 8. Write 1 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 0 1 8 8 0 0 8
8,008 ÷ 8 = 1,001 - Write the answer. 8,008 ÷ 8 = 1,001
Check. Multiply back: 1,001 × 8 = 1,000 × 8 + 1 × 8 = 8,000 + 8 = 8,008. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 1,001 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 2 0 1 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 3: 2 is smaller than 3, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 thousands for 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 0 hundreds there are 20 + 0 = 20 hundreds.
20 ÷ 3: 6 × 3 = 18, and 20 − 18 = 2. Write 6 above the 0.
Exchange: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 1 tens there are 20 + 1 = 21 tens.
21 ÷ 3: 7 × 3 = 21. Write 7 above the 1. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 3 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 7 0 3 2 20 21 0
2,010 ÷ 3 = 670 - Write the answer. 2,010 ÷ 3 = 670
Check. Multiply back: 670 × 3 = 600 × 3 + 70 × 3 = 1,800 + 210 = 2,010. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 670 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 3 4 5 6 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 5: 3 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 thousands for 30 hundreds. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 hundreds. With the 4 hundreds there are 30 + 4 = 34 hundreds.
34 ÷ 5: 6 × 5 = 30, and 34 − 30 = 4. Write 6 above the 4.
Exchange: 4 hundreds become 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 5 tens there are 40 + 5 = 45 tens.
45 ÷ 5: 9 × 5 = 45. Write 9 above the 5. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 5: 1 × 5 = 5, and 6 − 5 = 1. Write 1 above the 6.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 9 1 r 1 5 3 34 45 6
3,456 ÷ 5 = 691 r 1 - Write the answer. 3,456 ÷ 5 = 691 r 1
Check. Multiply back: 691 × 5 = 600 × 5 + 90 × 5 + 1 × 5 = 3,000 + 450 + 5 = 3,455
3,455 + 1 (the remainder) = 3,456. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 5: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 5.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 5 9 2 9 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 8: 5 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 thousands for 50 hundreds. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 hundreds. With the 9 hundreds there are 50 + 9 = 59 hundreds.
59 ÷ 8: 7 × 8 = 56, and 59 − 56 = 3. Write 7 above the 9.
Exchange: 3 hundreds become 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 2 tens there are 30 + 2 = 32 tens.
32 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32. Write 4 above the 2. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 9 ones.
9 ÷ 8: 1 × 8 = 8, and 9 − 8 = 1. Write 1 above the 9.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 4 1 r 1 8 5 59 32 9
5,929 ÷ 8 = 741 r 1 - Write the answer. 5,929 ÷ 8 = 741 r 1
Check. Multiply back: 741 × 8 = 700 × 8 + 40 × 8 + 1 × 8 = 5,600 + 320 + 8 = 5,928
5,928 + 1 (the remainder) = 5,929. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 8: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 8.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 9 9 9 9 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 7 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 2 thousands become 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 9 hundreds there are 20 + 9 = 29 hundreds.
29 ÷ 7: 4 × 7 = 28, and 29 − 28 = 1. Write 4 above the 9.
Exchange: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 9 tens there are 10 + 9 = 19 tens.
19 ÷ 7: 2 × 7 = 14, and 19 − 14 = 5. Write 2 above the 9.
Exchange: 5 tens become 50 ones. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 9 ones there are 50 + 9 = 59 ones.
59 ÷ 7: 8 × 7 = 56, and 59 − 56 = 3. Write 8 above the 9.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 2 8 r 3 7 9 29 19 59
9,999 ÷ 7 = 1,428 r 3 - Write the answer. 9,999 ÷ 7 = 1,428 r 3
Check. Multiply back: 1,428 × 7 = 1,000 × 7 + 400 × 7 + 20 × 7 + 8 × 7 = 7,000 + 2,800 + 140 + 56 = 9,996
9,996 + 3 (the remainder) = 9,999. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (7). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. Round the number being divided to a number that is easy to divide, then divide it.
- Look at the first two digits of 4,823. They tell us how many hundreds there are, roughly.4,823 is about 48 hundreds
- Find the nearest number in the 6 times table. We want a number that 6 divides into exactly.6 × 8 = 48, and 48 is the closest to 48
- Round the number. Replace 48 hundreds by 48 hundreds.4,823 ≈ 4,800
- Divide the rounded number. Use the fact 48 ÷ 6 = 8.48 hundreds ÷ 6 = 8 hundreds
4,800 ÷ 6 = 800 - Write the estimate. Use the sign ≈ for “is about”.4,823 ÷ 6 ≈ 800
Check. Multiply back: 800 × 6 = 4,800, which is close to 4,823. ✓
Watch out. An estimate is not the exact answer. Use it to check that your exact answer is about the right size.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. Round the number being divided to a number that is easy to divide, then divide it.
- Look at the first two digits of 7,184. They tell us how many hundreds there are, roughly.7,184 is about 71 hundreds
- Find the nearest number in the 9 times table. We want a number that 9 divides into exactly.9 × 8 = 72, and 72 is the closest to 71
- Round the number. Replace 71 hundreds by 72 hundreds.7,184 ≈ 7,200
- Divide the rounded number. Use the fact 72 ÷ 9 = 8.72 hundreds ÷ 9 = 8 hundreds
7,200 ÷ 9 = 800 - Write the estimate. Use the sign ≈ for “is about”.7,184 ÷ 9 ≈ 800
Check. Multiply back: 800 × 9 = 7,200, which is close to 7,184. ✓
Watch out. An estimate is not the exact answer. Use it to check that your exact answer is about the right size.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. Round the number being divided to a number that is easy to divide, then divide it.
- Look at the first two digits of 2,968. They tell us how many hundreds there are, roughly.2,968 is about 29 hundreds
- Find the nearest number in the 3 times table. We want a number that 3 divides into exactly.3 × 10 = 30, and 30 is the closest to 29
- Round the number. Replace 29 hundreds by 30 hundreds.2,968 ≈ 3,000
- Divide the rounded number. Use the fact 30 ÷ 3 = 10.30 hundreds ÷ 3 = 10 hundreds
3,000 ÷ 3 = 1,000 - Write the estimate. Use the sign ≈ for “is about”.2,968 ÷ 3 ≈ 1,000
Check. Multiply back: 1,000 × 3 = 3,000, which is close to 2,968. ✓
Watch out. An estimate is not the exact answer. Use it to check that your exact answer is about the right size.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Estimate first by rounding. Then use short division, and compare the answer with your estimate.
- Estimate first. Round 7,184 to a number that 9 divides into easily. This tells us roughly what the answer should be.7,184 ≈ 7,200, so 7,200 ÷ 9 = 800
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 7 1 8 4 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 9: 7 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 7 thousands for 70 hundreds. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 hundreds. With the 1 hundreds there are 70 + 1 = 71 hundreds.
71 ÷ 9: 7 × 9 = 63, and 71 − 63 = 8. Write 7 above the 1.
Exchange: 8 hundreds become 80 tens. Carry 8 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 8 that was carried.The carried 8 makes 80 tens. With the 8 tens there are 80 + 8 = 88 tens.
88 ÷ 9: 9 × 9 = 81, and 88 − 81 = 7. Write 9 above the 8.
Exchange: 7 tens become 70 ones. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 4 ones there are 70 + 4 = 74 ones.
74 ÷ 9: 8 × 9 = 72, and 74 − 72 = 2. Write 8 above the 4.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 9 8 r 2 9 7 71 88 74
7,184 ÷ 9 = 798 r 2 - Compare the answer with the estimate. They should be close.798 r 2 is close to 800. ✓
- Write the answer. 798 r 2
Check. Estimate: 7,184 ≈ 7,200, and 7,200 ÷ 9 = 800. The answer 798 is close to 800. ✓
Watch out. If your answer is nowhere near the estimate, check your carries and your zeros.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Estimate first by rounding. Then use short division, and compare the answer with your estimate.
- Estimate first. Round 4,823 to a number that 6 divides into easily. This tells us roughly what the answer should be.4,823 ≈ 4,800, so 4,800 ÷ 6 = 800
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 4 8 2 3 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 6: 4 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 thousands for 40 hundreds. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 hundreds. With the 8 hundreds there are 40 + 8 = 48 hundreds.
48 ÷ 6: 8 × 6 = 48. Write 8 above the 8. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 2 tens.
2 ÷ 6: 2 is smaller than 6, so write 0.
Exchange: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 3 ones there are 20 + 3 = 23 ones.
23 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18, and 23 − 18 = 5. Write 3 above the 3.
The remainder is 5. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 0 3 r 5 6 4 48 2 23
4,823 ÷ 6 = 803 r 5 - Compare the answer with the estimate. They should be close.803 r 5 is close to 800. ✓
- Write the answer. 803 r 5
Check. Estimate: 4,823 ≈ 4,800, and 4,800 ÷ 6 = 800. The answer 803 is close to 800. ✓
Watch out. If your answer is nowhere near the estimate, check your carries and your zeros.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. Use the inverse operation. Multiply your answer by the divisor (and add any remainder). You should get back the number you started with.
- Multiply the answer by the number you divided by. Multiplying is the inverse (opposite) of dividing, so it should take us back to the start.453 × 3 = 400 × 3 + 50 × 3 + 3 × 3 = 1,200 + 150 + 9 = 1,359
- Compare with 1,359. If 453 is right, we get back to exactly 1,359.1,359 = 1,359
- Decide. We got back to the number we started with.Yes, Zainab is correct: 1,359 ÷ 3 = 453.
Check. The check itself: 453 groups of 3 is 1,359.
Watch out. This check works for any division. Use it whenever you want to be sure.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. Use the inverse operation. Multiply your answer by the divisor (and add any remainder). You should get back the number you started with.
- Multiply the answer by the number you divided by. Multiplying is the inverse (opposite) of dividing, so it should take us back to the start.365 × 6 = 300 × 6 + 60 × 6 + 5 × 6 = 1,800 + 360 + 30 = 2,190
- Compare with 2,184. If 365 is right, we get back to exactly 2,184.2,190 ≠ 2,184
- Decide. We did not get back to 2,184, so Leo’s answer is not right.No. The correct answer is 364.
- Find the correct answer. Use short division.
0 3 6 4 6 2 21 38 24
2,184 ÷ 6 = 364
Check. The check itself: 365 groups of 6 is 2,190.
Watch out. Do not forget to add the remainder when you multiply back.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. Use the inverse operation. Multiply your answer by the divisor (and add any remainder). You should get back the number you started with.
- Multiply the answer by the number you divided by. Multiplying is the inverse (opposite) of dividing, so it should take us back to the start.83 × 5 = 80 × 5 + 3 × 5 = 400 + 15 = 415
- Compare with 4,015. If 83 is right, we get back to exactly 4,015.415 ≠ 4,015
- Decide. We did not get back to 4,015, so Mei’s answer is not right.No. The correct answer is 803.
- Find the correct answer. Use short division.
0 8 0 3 5 4 40 1 15
4,015 ÷ 5 = 803
Check. The check itself: 83 groups of 5 is 415.
Watch out. Do not forget to add the remainder when you multiply back.
| 0 | ||||
| 8 | 6 | 60 | 4 | 8 |
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. The 6 thousands were too small to share (grey 0), so they were carried. Use the carried 6 to divide the hundreds.
- Exchange the carried 6. 6 thousands become 60 hundreds. There are 0 hundreds in the number, so we have 60 hundreds.60 + 0 = 60 hundreds
- Divide. Use the 8 times table.60 ÷ 8 = 7 remainder 4, because 7 × 8 = 56 and 60 − 56 = 4
Write 7 above the 0.0 7 8 6 60 44 8
Check. 7 × 8 = 56. ✓
Watch out. The carried digit is added to the digit it is in front of, as tens of that place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. The remainder from the last step is carried to the next digit.
- Find the remainder. From the last step: 60 ÷ 8 = 7 remainder 4.60 − 56 = 4
- Carry the remainder. 4 hundreds are exchanged for 40 tens, so the 4 is written small in front of the next digit, the 4 in the tens place.
0 7 8 6 60 44 8
Check. The tens column now has 40 + 4 = 44 tens.
Watch out. The carried number is the remainder.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 6 0 4 8 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 8: 6 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 6 thousands for 60 hundreds. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 hundreds. With the 0 hundreds there are 60 + 0 = 60 hundreds.
60 ÷ 8: 7 × 8 = 56, and 60 − 56 = 4. Write 7 above the 0.
Exchange: 4 hundreds become 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 4 tens there are 40 + 4 = 44 tens.
44 ÷ 8: 5 × 8 = 40, and 44 − 40 = 4. Write 5 above the 4.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 8 ones there are 40 + 8 = 48 ones.
48 ÷ 8: 6 × 8 = 48. Write 6 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 5 6 8 6 60 44 48
6,048 ÷ 8 = 756 - Write the answer. 6,048 ÷ 8 = 756
Check. Multiply back: 756 × 8 = 700 × 8 + 50 × 8 + 6 × 8 = 5,600 + 400 + 48 = 6,048. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 8, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 8 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 3,648 is shared equally between 8, so divide by 8.3,648 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 3 6 4 8 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 8: 3 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 thousands for 30 hundreds. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 hundreds. With the 6 hundreds there are 30 + 6 = 36 hundreds.
36 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32, and 36 − 32 = 4. Write 4 above the 6.
Exchange: 4 hundreds become 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 4 tens there are 40 + 4 = 44 tens.
44 ÷ 8: 5 × 8 = 40, and 44 − 40 = 4. Write 5 above the 4.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 8 ones there are 40 + 8 = 48 ones.
48 ÷ 8: 6 × 8 = 48. Write 6 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 5 6 8 3 36 44 48
3,648 ÷ 8 = 456 - Write the answer. Include the unit.456 books
Check. Multiply back: 456 × 8 = 400 × 8 + 50 × 8 + 6 × 8 = 3,200 + 400 + 48 = 3,648. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 8, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is a group of 5. We count how many boxes make 7,500.
- Choose the operation. We find how many groups of 5 fit into 7,500, so divide by 5.7,500 ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 7 5 0 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 2 thousands become 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 5 hundreds there are 20 + 5 = 25 hundreds.
25 ÷ 5: 5 × 5 = 25. Write 5 above the 5. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 5 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 5 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 5 0 0 5 7 25 0 0
7,500 ÷ 5 = 1,500 - Write the answer. Include the unit.1,500 boxes
Check. Multiply back: 1,500 × 5 = 1,000 × 5 + 500 × 5 = 5,000 + 2,500 = 7,500. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 1,500 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 9 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 9,072 is shared equally between 9, so divide by 9.9,072 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 9 0 7 2 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 9 = 1
Write 1 above the 9. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 hundreds.
0 ÷ 9 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 7 tens.
7 ÷ 9: 7 is smaller than 9, so write 0.
Exchange: 7 tens become 70 ones. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 2 ones there are 70 + 2 = 72 ones.
72 ÷ 9: 8 × 9 = 72. Write 8 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 0 8 9 9 0 7 72
9,072 ÷ 9 = 1,008 - Write the answer. Include the unit.1,008 seats
Check. Multiply back: 1,008 × 9 = 1,000 × 9 + 8 × 9 = 9,000 + 72 = 9,072. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 1,008 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is one hour. The 8 boxes make 2,480, and we need the value of 5 boxes.
- Find the buns made in one hour. The same number is made every hour, so divide the total by 8.2,480 ÷ 8 = 310
- Find the buns made in 5 hours. 5 hours of 310 buns, so multiply by 5.310 × 5 = 1,550
- Write the answer. Include the unit.1,550 buns
Check. 310 × 8 = 2,480, so one hour is right. ✓
Watch out. Find one hour first (divide), then scale up to 5 hours (multiply).
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Work out the correct answer yourself first. Then compare it with the answer in the question to find the mistake.
- Work it out carefully. Do the question again, one step at a time.
0 9 0 3 6 5 54 1 18
5,418 ÷ 6 = 903 - Compare with the answer in the question. Mia wrote 93, which is not 903.
- Find the mistake. Mia left out a zero. Some digits do not divide, and the zero is a place holder. Without it, every digit after it is in the wrong column.
- Write the correct answer. The correct answer is 903.
Check. Multiply back: 903 × 6 = 900 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 5,400 + 18 = 5,418. ✓
Watch out. Write a 0 above every digit that has nothing to give.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.1,000 ÷ 4 = 250 (3 digits)
4,000 ÷ 4 = 1,000 (4 digits) - Look for one that does not work. One example that breaks the rule is called a counter-example.4,000 ÷ 4 = 1,000 has 4 digits.
- Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.1,000 to 3,999 divided by 4 give 250 to 999 (3 digits). From 4,000 upwards the answer has 4 digits. It depends on the number.
- Decide. Sometimes
Check. We found one example each way. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.12 ÷ 4 = 3 and 12 ÷ 2 = 6
36 ÷ 4 = 9 and 36 ÷ 2 = 18
1,000 ÷ 4 = 250 and 1,000 ÷ 2 = 500 - Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.Dividing by 4 means dividing by 2 and then by 2 again. If a number divides by 4 exactly, the first division by 2 is already exact, so it also divides by 2.
- Decide. Always
Check. Every example worked. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. To show that a division is right, use the opposite operation: multiply the answer by the number you divided by.
- Write what we have to show. We need to check the division is right.3,150 ÷ 6 = 525
- Multiply the answer by the divisor. If the division is right, this must give the number we started with.525 × 6 = 500 × 6 + 20 × 6 + 5 × 6 = 3,000 + 120 + 30 = 3,150
- Compare and write a conclusion. Say what the working shows.525 × 6 = 3,150, so 3,150 ÷ 6 = 525. It is shown.
Check. Use short division: 3,150 ÷ 6 = 525. ✓
Watch out. Write a sentence at the end. The working alone is not a conclusion.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Try each card as the divisor. For each choice, make the biggest 3-digit number from the other three cards. Compare the answers.
- Choose the one-digit number. There are four cards, so there are four choices for the divisor. We try them all.2, 4, 6, 9
- Make the biggest 3-digit number each time. To get the biggest answer, put the biggest digit in the hundreds place, then the next biggest in the tens place.
Divisor 3-digit number Division Answer 2 964 964 ÷ 2 482 4 962 962 ÷ 4 240 r 2 6 942 942 ÷ 6 157 9 642 642 ÷ 9 71 r 3 - Pick the biggest answer. Compare the four answers.The biggest answer is 482, from 964 ÷ 2.
Check. 482 × 2 = 964, and 964 − 964 = 0. ✓
Watch out. The biggest answer comes from dividing by the smallest card. Try them all to be sure.
What do we do with the remainder?
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
When one number does not divide exactly into another, there is a remainder. What you do with it depends on the story in the question. Think about 100 eggs put into boxes of 6. 100 ÷ 6 = 16 remainder 4: there are 16 full boxes and 4 eggs left over.
There are four things you might do.
1. Round up. “How many boxes are needed for all the eggs?” The 4 left-over eggs still need a box, so we need 16 + 1 = 17 boxes. 2. Round down. “How many full boxes can she fill?” The 4 eggs cannot fill another box, so the answer is 16. 3. The remainder is the answer. “How many eggs are left over?” The answer is the remainder, 4. 4. Fractions and decimals. If you are sharing something that can be cut up, the remainder can be shared too. 7 pizzas shared between 2 children is 7 ÷ 2 = 3 remainder 1. The last pizza is cut in 2 halves, so each child gets 3 and a half: 3½ or 3.5.
| If the question says… | then… | example |
|---|---|---|
| how many are needed / how many trips | round up | 100 eggs, boxes of 6: 17 boxes |
| how many full / how many can she buy | round down | 100 eggs, boxes of 6: 16 full boxes |
| how many are left over | use the remainder | 100 eggs, boxes of 6: 4 left |
| share something that can be cut | fraction or decimal | 7 ÷ 2 = 3 r 1 = 3½ = 3.5 |
Key ideas
- A remainder is what is left over. It is always smaller than the divisor.
- Round up when everything must be fitted in (how many boxes, buses or trips are needed).
- Round down when only whole groups count (how many full boxes, how many can you buy).
- The remainder itself is the answer when the question asks how many are left over.
- A remainder can be written as a fraction (remainder over divisor) or as a decimal: 7 ÷ 2 = 3 r 1 = 3½ = 3.5.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 165 into groups of 8. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 8 fit into 165, so divide.165 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 1 6 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 8: 1 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 6 tens there are 10 + 6 = 16 tens.
16 ÷ 8: 2 × 8 = 16. Write 2 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 5 ones.
5 ÷ 8: 5 is smaller than 8, so write 0.
The remainder is 5. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 0 r 5 8 1 16 5
165 ÷ 8 = 20 r 5 - Say what the remainder means. 165 ÷ 8 = 20 remainder 5: that is 20 full minibuses and 5 children left over.20 full minibuses + 5 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 5 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more minibus is needed. We round the answer up.20 + 1 = 21
- Write the answer. Include the unit.21 minibuses
Check. 20 × 8 = 160 and 160 + 5 = 165. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 5 left over would have no minibus.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 100 into groups of 6. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 6 fit into 100, so divide.100 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 1 0 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 0 tens there are 10 + 0 = 10 tens.
10 ÷ 6: 1 × 6 = 6, and 10 − 6 = 4. Write 1 above the 0.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 0 ones there are 40 + 0 = 40 ones.
40 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36, and 40 − 36 = 4. Write 6 above the 0.
The remainder is 4. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 1 6 r 4 6 1 10 40
100 ÷ 6 = 16 r 4 - Say what the remainder means. 100 ÷ 6 = 16 remainder 4: that is 16 full boxes and 4 eggs left over.16 full boxes + 4 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 4 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more box is needed. We round the answer up.16 + 1 = 17
- Write the answer. Include the unit.17 boxes
Check. 16 × 6 = 96 and 96 + 4 = 100. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 4 left over would have no box.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 50 into groups of 6. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 6 fit into 50, so divide.50 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 5 0 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 6: 5 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 tens for 50 ones. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 0 ones there are 50 + 0 = 50 ones.
50 ÷ 6: 8 × 6 = 48, and 50 − 48 = 2. Write 8 above the 0.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 r 2 6 5 50
50 ÷ 6 = 8 r 2 - Say what the remainder means. 50 ÷ 6 = 8 remainder 2: that is 8 full tickets and 2 pounds left over.8 full tickets + 2 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full tickets count. The 2 left over cannot make another one. We round the answer down (we ignore the remainder).8 full tickets
- Write the answer. Include the unit.8 tickets
Check. 8 × 6 = 48 and 48 + 2 = 50. ✓
Watch out. Do not round up here: the extra ticket would not be full.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 150 into groups of 8. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 8 fit into 150, so divide.150 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 1 5 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 8: 1 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 5 tens there are 10 + 5 = 15 tens.
15 ÷ 8: 1 × 8 = 8, and 15 − 8 = 7. Write 1 above the 5.
Exchange: 7 tens become 70 ones. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 0 ones there are 70 + 0 = 70 ones.
70 ÷ 8: 8 × 8 = 64, and 70 − 64 = 6. Write 8 above the 0.
The remainder is 6. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 1 8 r 6 8 1 15 70
150 ÷ 8 = 18 r 6 - Say what the remainder means. 150 ÷ 8 = 18 remainder 6: that is 18 full boxes and 6 cupcakes left over.18 full boxes + 6 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full boxes count. The 6 left over cannot make another one. We round the answer down (we ignore the remainder).18 full boxes
- Write the answer. Include the unit.18 boxes
Check. 18 × 8 = 144 and 144 + 6 = 150. ✓
Watch out. Do not round up here: the extra box would not be full.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 83 into groups of 5. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 5 fit into 83, so divide.83 ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 8 3 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 3 ones there are 30 + 3 = 33 ones.
33 ÷ 5: 6 × 5 = 30, and 33 − 30 = 3. Write 6 above the 3.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 6 r 3 5 8 33
83 ÷ 5 = 16 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. 83 ÷ 5 = 16 remainder 3: that is 16 full bags and 3 sweets left over.16 full bags + 3 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The question asks how many are left over. That is the remainder itself.3 sweets left over
- Write the answer. Include the unit.3 sweets
Check. 16 × 5 = 80 and 80 + 3 = 83. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number of full groups.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide to find the whole number and the remainder. The remainder can be written as a fraction (remainder over divisor) or carried on as a decimal.
- Divide with a remainder. First divide as usual and find the remainder.
3 r 1 2 7
7 ÷ 2 = 3 remainder 1 - Write the remainder as a fraction. The 1 left over is shared into 2 equal parts, so each share gets 12 of one more.12
7 ÷ 2 = 3 r 1 = 312 - Write the remainder as a decimal. Add a point and 1 zero, and carry on dividing. The 1 left over becomes 10 tenths.
3 . 5 2 7 . 10
7 ÷ 2 = 3.5 - Write all three answers. They all mean the same amount.3 r 1 = 312 = 3.5
Check. 3.5 × 2 = 7. ✓
Watch out. The fraction is the remainder over the divisor, not over the original number.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide to find the whole number and the remainder. The remainder can be written as a fraction (remainder over divisor) or carried on as a decimal.
- Divide with a remainder. First divide as usual and find the remainder.
0 3 r 1 4 1 13
13 ÷ 4 = 3 remainder 1 - Write the remainder as a fraction. The 1 left over is shared into 4 equal parts, so each share gets 14 of one more.14
13 ÷ 4 = 3 r 1 = 314 - Write the remainder as a decimal. Add a point and 2 zeros, and carry on dividing. The 1 left over becomes 10 tenths.
0 3 . 2 5 4 1 13 . 10 20
13 ÷ 4 = 3.25 - Write all three answers. They all mean the same amount.3 r 1 = 314 = 3.25
Check. 3.25 × 4 = 13. ✓
Watch out. The fraction is the remainder over the divisor, not over the original number.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide to find the whole number and the remainder. The remainder can be written as a fraction (remainder over divisor) or carried on as a decimal.
- Divide with a remainder. First divide as usual and find the remainder.
0 r 3 4 3
3 ÷ 4 = 0 remainder 3 - Write the remainder as a fraction. The 3 left over is shared into 4 equal parts, so each share gets 34 of one more.34
3 ÷ 4 = 0 r 3 = 34 - Write the remainder as a decimal. Add a point and 2 zeros, and carry on dividing. The 3 left over becomes 30 tenths.
0 . 7 5 4 3 . 30 20
3 ÷ 4 = 0.75 - Write all three answers. They all mean the same amount.0 r 3 = 34 = 0.75
Check. 0.75 × 4 = 3. ✓
Watch out. The fraction is the remainder over the divisor, not over the original number.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Divide the pounds. If there is a remainder, carry on dividing into tenths and hundredths (10p and 1p).
- Choose the operation. £9 is shared equally between 4, so divide by 4. Money needs 2 decimal places (pounds and pence), so we add a point and 2 zeros.9 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left. We write a decimal point and 2 zeros after the 9. They do not change its value, but they give us places to carry the remainder into.
4 9 . 0 0 - Divide the ones. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 4 = 2, remainder 1
Write 2 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 1 one becomes 10 tenths. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tenths. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tenths. With the 0 tenths there are 10 + 0 = 10 tenths.
10 ÷ 4: 2 × 4 = 8, and 10 − 8 = 2. Write 2 above the 0.
Exchange: 2 tenths become 20 hundredths. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundredths. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundredths. With the 0 hundredths there are 20 + 0 = 20 hundredths.
20 ÷ 4: 5 × 4 = 20. Write 5 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so the division is exact. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right. The point in the answer is straight above the point in the bus stop.
2 . 2 5 4 9 . 10 20
9 ÷ 4 = 2.25 - Write the answer in pounds and pence. Give the answer to 2 decimal places.£2.25
Check. £2.25 × 4 = £9. ✓
Watch out. Write money with 2 decimal places: £3.50, not £3.5.
Watch out
Do not just write the remainder after the answer without thinking. 100 ÷ 6 = 16 r 4 means 16 full boxes, but 17 boxes are needed for all the eggs. Also, the remainder in a fraction goes over the divisor, not over the original number: 7 ÷ 2 = 3 r 1 = 3½, not 31⁄7.Exercise 5E Remainders
Non-calculatorKey words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 4 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 6: 4 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 tens for 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 5 ones there are 40 + 5 = 45 ones.
45 ÷ 6: 7 × 6 = 42, and 45 − 42 = 3. Write 7 above the 5.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 r 3 6 4 45
45 ÷ 6 = 7 r 3 - Write the answer. 45 ÷ 6 = 7 r 3
Check. Multiply back: 7 × 6 = 42
42 + 3 (the remainder) = 45. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 6: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 6.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 1 0 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 7: 1 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 0 tens there are 10 + 0 = 10 tens.
10 ÷ 7: 1 × 7 = 7, and 10 − 7 = 3. Write 1 above the 0.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 0 ones there are 30 + 0 = 30 ones.
30 ÷ 7: 4 × 7 = 28, and 30 − 28 = 2. Write 4 above the 0.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 1 4 r 2 7 1 10 30
100 ÷ 7 = 14 r 2 - Write the answer. 100 ÷ 7 = 14 r 2
Check. Multiply back: 14 × 7 = 10 × 7 + 4 × 7 = 70 + 28 = 98
98 + 2 (the remainder) = 100. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 7: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 7.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 2 5 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 8: 2 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 5 tens there are 20 + 5 = 25 tens.
25 ÷ 8: 3 × 8 = 24, and 25 − 24 = 1. Write 3 above the 5.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 0 ones there are 10 + 0 = 10 ones.
10 ÷ 8: 1 × 8 = 8, and 10 − 8 = 2. Write 1 above the 0.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 3 1 r 2 8 2 25 10
250 ÷ 8 = 31 r 2 - Write the answer. 250 ÷ 8 = 31 r 2
Check. Multiply back: 31 × 8 = 30 × 8 + 1 × 8 = 240 + 8 = 248
248 + 2 (the remainder) = 250. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 8: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 8.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 53 into groups of 8. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 8 fit into 53, so divide.53 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 5 3 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 8: 5 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 tens for 50 ones. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 3 ones there are 50 + 3 = 53 ones.
53 ÷ 8: 6 × 8 = 48, and 53 − 48 = 5. Write 6 above the 3.
The remainder is 5. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 r 5 8 5 53
53 ÷ 8 = 6 r 5 - Say what the remainder means. 53 ÷ 8 = 6 remainder 5: that is 6 full minibuses and 5 children left over.6 full minibuses + 5 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 5 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more minibus is needed. We round the answer up.6 + 1 = 7
- Write the answer. Include the unit.7 minibuses
Check. 6 × 8 = 48 and 48 + 5 = 53. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 5 left over would have no minibus.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 130 into groups of 9. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 9 fit into 130, so divide.130 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 1 3 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 9: 1 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 3 tens there are 10 + 3 = 13 tens.
13 ÷ 9: 1 × 9 = 9, and 13 − 9 = 4. Write 1 above the 3.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 0 ones there are 40 + 0 = 40 ones.
40 ÷ 9: 4 × 9 = 36, and 40 − 36 = 4. Write 4 above the 0.
The remainder is 4. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 1 4 r 4 9 1 13 40
130 ÷ 9 = 14 r 4 - Say what the remainder means. 130 ÷ 9 = 14 remainder 4: that is 14 full trips and 4 books left over.14 full trips + 4 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 4 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more trip is needed. We round the answer up.14 + 1 = 15
- Write the answer. Include the unit.15 trips
Check. 14 × 9 = 126 and 126 + 4 = 130. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 4 left over would have no trip.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 37 into groups of 4. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 4 fit into 37, so divide.37 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 3 7 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 4: 3 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 tens for 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 7 ones there are 30 + 7 = 37 ones.
37 ÷ 4: 9 × 4 = 36, and 37 − 36 = 1. Write 9 above the 7.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 r 1 4 3 37
37 ÷ 4 = 9 r 1 - Say what the remainder means. 37 ÷ 4 = 9 remainder 1: that is 9 full tables and 1 people left over.9 full tables + 1 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 1 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more table is needed. We round the answer up.9 + 1 = 10
- Write the answer. Include the unit.10 tables
Check. 9 × 4 = 36 and 36 + 1 = 37. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 1 left over would have no table.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 70 into groups of 8. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 8 fit into 70, so divide.70 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 7 0 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 8: 7 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 7 tens for 70 ones. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 0 ones there are 70 + 0 = 70 ones.
70 ÷ 8: 8 × 8 = 64, and 70 − 64 = 6. Write 8 above the 0.
The remainder is 6. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 r 6 8 7 70
70 ÷ 8 = 8 r 6 - Say what the remainder means. 70 ÷ 8 = 8 remainder 6: that is 8 full sweets and 6 pence left over.8 full sweets + 6 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full sweets count. The 6 left over cannot make another one. We round the answer down (we ignore the remainder).8 full sweets
- Write the answer. Include the unit.8 sweets
Check. 8 × 8 = 64 and 64 + 6 = 70. ✓
Watch out. Do not round up here: the extra sweet would not be full.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 100 into groups of 7. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 7 fit into 100, so divide.100 ÷ 7
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 1 0 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 7: 1 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 0 tens there are 10 + 0 = 10 tens.
10 ÷ 7: 1 × 7 = 7, and 10 − 7 = 3. Write 1 above the 0.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 0 ones there are 30 + 0 = 30 ones.
30 ÷ 7: 4 × 7 = 28, and 30 − 28 = 2. Write 4 above the 0.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 1 4 r 2 7 1 10 30
100 ÷ 7 = 14 r 2 - Say what the remainder means. 100 ÷ 7 = 14 remainder 2: that is 14 full gifts and 2 cm left over.14 full gifts + 2 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full gifts count. The 2 left over cannot make another one. We round the answer down (we ignore the remainder).14 full gifts
- Write the answer. Include the unit.14 gifts
Check. 14 × 7 = 98 and 98 + 2 = 100. ✓
Watch out. Do not round up here: the extra gift would not be full.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 150 into groups of 4. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 4 fit into 150, so divide.150 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 1 5 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 4: 1 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 5 tens there are 10 + 5 = 15 tens.
15 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12, and 15 − 12 = 3. Write 3 above the 5.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 0 ones there are 30 + 0 = 30 ones.
30 ÷ 4: 7 × 4 = 28, and 30 − 28 = 2. Write 7 above the 0.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 3 7 r 2 4 1 15 30
150 ÷ 4 = 37 r 2 - Say what the remainder means. 150 ÷ 4 = 37 remainder 2: that is 37 full boxes and 2 cakes left over.37 full boxes + 2 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full boxes count. The 2 left over cannot make another one. We round the answer down (we ignore the remainder).37 full boxes
- Write the answer. Include the unit.37 boxes
Check. 37 × 4 = 148 and 148 + 2 = 150. ✓
Watch out. Do not round up here: the extra box would not be full.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 58 into groups of 7. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 7 fit into 58, so divide.58 ÷ 7
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 5 8 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 7: 5 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 tens for 50 ones. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 8 ones there are 50 + 8 = 58 ones.
58 ÷ 7: 8 × 7 = 56, and 58 − 56 = 2. Write 8 above the 8.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 r 2 7 5 58
58 ÷ 7 = 8 r 2 - Say what the remainder means. 58 ÷ 7 = 8 remainder 2: that is 8 full baskets and 2 apples left over.8 full baskets + 2 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The question asks how many are left over. That is the remainder itself.2 apples left over
- Write the answer. Include the unit.2 apples
Check. 8 × 7 = 56 and 56 + 2 = 58. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number of full groups.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 100 into groups of 9. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 9 fit into 100, so divide.100 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 1 0 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 9: 1 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 0 tens there are 10 + 0 = 10 tens.
10 ÷ 9: 1 × 9 = 9, and 10 − 9 = 1. Write 1 above the 0.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 0 ones there are 10 + 0 = 10 ones.
10 ÷ 9: 1 × 9 = 9, and 10 − 9 = 1. Write 1 above the 0.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 1 1 r 1 9 1 10 10
100 ÷ 9 = 11 r 1 - Say what the remainder means. 100 ÷ 9 = 11 remainder 1: that is 11 full players and 1 cards left over.11 full players + 1 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The question asks how many are left over. That is the remainder itself.1 card left over
- Write the answer. Include the unit.1 card
Check. 11 × 9 = 99 and 99 + 1 = 100. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number of full groups.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 200 into groups of 6. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 6 fit into 200, so divide.200 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 2 0 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 6: 2 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 0 tens there are 20 + 0 = 20 tens.
20 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18, and 20 − 18 = 2. Write 3 above the 0.
Exchange: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 0 ones there are 20 + 0 = 20 ones.
20 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18, and 20 − 18 = 2. Write 3 above the 0.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 3 3 r 2 6 2 20 20
200 ÷ 6 = 33 r 2 - Say what the remainder means. 200 ÷ 6 = 33 remainder 2: that is 33 full necklaces and 2 beads left over.33 full necklaces + 2 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The question asks how many are left over. That is the remainder itself.2 beads left over
- Write the answer. Include the unit.2 beads
Check. 33 × 6 = 198 and 198 + 2 = 200. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number of full groups.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 75 into groups of 4. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 4 fit into 75, so divide.75 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 7 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 4: 8 × 4 = 32, and 35 − 32 = 3. Write 8 above the 5.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 8 r 3 4 7 35
75 ÷ 4 = 18 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. 75 ÷ 4 = 18 remainder 3: that is 18 full strips and 3 cm left over.18 full strips + 3 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full strips count. The 3 left over cannot make another one. We round the answer down (we ignore the remainder).18 full strips
- Write the answer. Include the unit.18 strips
Check. 18 × 4 = 72 and 72 + 3 = 75. ✓
Watch out. Do not round up here: the extra strip would not be full.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 75 into groups of 4. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 4 fit into 75, so divide.75 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 7 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 4: 8 × 4 = 32, and 35 − 32 = 3. Write 8 above the 5.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 8 r 3 4 7 35
75 ÷ 4 = 18 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. 75 ÷ 4 = 18 remainder 3: that is 18 full teams and 3 pupils left over.18 full teams + 3 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 3 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more team is needed. We round the answer up.18 + 1 = 19
- Write the answer. Include the unit.19 teams
Check. 18 × 4 = 72 and 72 + 3 = 75. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 3 left over would have no team.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 75 into groups of 4. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 4 fit into 75, so divide.75 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 7 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 4: 8 × 4 = 32, and 35 − 32 = 3. Write 8 above the 5.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 8 r 3 4 7 35
75 ÷ 4 = 18 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. 75 ÷ 4 = 18 remainder 3: that is 18 full teams and 3 pupils left over.18 full teams + 3 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The question asks how many are left over. That is the remainder itself.3 pupils left over
- Write the answer. Include the unit.3 pupils
Check. 18 × 4 = 72 and 72 + 3 = 75. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number of full groups.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 206 into groups of 5. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 5 fit into 206, so divide.206 ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 2 0 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 5: 2 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 0 tens there are 20 + 0 = 20 tens.
20 ÷ 5: 4 × 5 = 20. Write 4 above the 0. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 5: 1 × 5 = 5, and 6 − 5 = 1. Write 1 above the 6.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 1 r 1 5 2 20 6
206 ÷ 5 = 41 r 1 - Say what the remainder means. 206 ÷ 5 = 41 remainder 1: that is 41 full sheets and 1 stickers left over.41 full sheets + 1 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 1 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more sheet is needed. We round the answer up.41 + 1 = 42
- Write the answer. Include the unit.42 sheets
Check. 41 × 5 = 205 and 205 + 1 = 206. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 1 left over would have no sheet.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide to find the whole number and the remainder. The remainder can be written as a fraction (remainder over divisor) or carried on as a decimal.
- Divide with a remainder. First divide as usual and find the remainder.
4 r 1 2 9
9 ÷ 2 = 4 remainder 1 - Write the remainder as a fraction. The 1 left over is shared into 2 equal parts, so each share gets 12 of one more.12
9 ÷ 2 = 4 r 1 = 412 - Write the remainder as a decimal. Add a point and 1 zero, and carry on dividing. The 1 left over becomes 10 tenths.
4 . 5 2 9 . 10
9 ÷ 2 = 4.5 - Write all three answers. They all mean the same amount.4 r 1 = 412 = 4.5
Check. 4.5 × 2 = 9. ✓
Watch out. The fraction is the remainder over the divisor, not over the original number.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide to find the whole number and the remainder. The remainder can be written as a fraction (remainder over divisor) or carried on as a decimal.
- Divide with a remainder. First divide as usual and find the remainder.
0 2 r 3 5 1 13
13 ÷ 5 = 2 remainder 3 - Write the remainder as a fraction. The 3 left over is shared into 5 equal parts, so each share gets 35 of one more.35
13 ÷ 5 = 2 r 3 = 235 - Write the remainder as a decimal. Add a point and 1 zero, and carry on dividing. The 3 left over becomes 30 tenths.
0 2 . 6 5 1 13 . 30
13 ÷ 5 = 2.6 - Write all three answers. They all mean the same amount.2 r 3 = 235 = 2.6
Check. 2.6 × 5 = 13. ✓
Watch out. The fraction is the remainder over the divisor, not over the original number.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide to find the whole number and the remainder. The remainder can be written as a fraction (remainder over divisor) or carried on as a decimal.
- Divide with a remainder. First divide as usual and find the remainder.
0 r 3 4 3
3 ÷ 4 = 0 remainder 3 - Write the remainder as a fraction. The 3 left over is shared into 4 equal parts, so each share gets 34 of one more.34
3 ÷ 4 = 0 r 3 = 34 - Write the remainder as a decimal. Add a point and 2 zeros, and carry on dividing. The 3 left over becomes 30 tenths.
0 . 7 5 4 3 . 30 20
3 ÷ 4 = 0.75 - Write all three answers. They all mean the same amount.0 r 3 = 34 = 0.75
Check. 0.75 × 4 = 3. ✓
Watch out. The fraction is the remainder over the divisor, not over the original number.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Divide the pounds. If there is a remainder, carry on dividing into tenths and hundredths (10p and 1p).
- Choose the operation. £15 is shared equally between 4, so divide by 4. Money needs 2 decimal places (pounds and pence), so we add a point and 2 zeros.15 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left. We write a decimal point and 2 zeros after the 15. They do not change its value, but they give us places to carry the remainder into.
4 1 5 . 0 0 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 4: 1 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 ten for 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 5 ones there are 10 + 5 = 15 ones.
15 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12, and 15 − 12 = 3. Write 3 above the 5.
Exchange: 3 ones become 30 tenths. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tenths. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tenths. With the 0 tenths there are 30 + 0 = 30 tenths.
30 ÷ 4: 7 × 4 = 28, and 30 − 28 = 2. Write 7 above the 0.
Exchange: 2 tenths become 20 hundredths. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundredths. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundredths. With the 0 hundredths there are 20 + 0 = 20 hundredths.
20 ÷ 4: 5 × 4 = 20. Write 5 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so the division is exact. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right. The point in the answer is straight above the point in the bus stop.
0 3 . 7 5 4 1 15 . 30 20
15 ÷ 4 = 3.75 - Write the answer in pounds and pence. Give the answer to 2 decimal places.£3.75
Check. £3.75 × 4 = £15. ✓
Watch out. Write money with 2 decimal places: £3.50, not £3.5.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Divide the pounds. If there is a remainder, carry on dividing into tenths and hundredths (10p and 1p).
- Choose the operation. £7 is shared equally between 2, so divide by 2. Money needs 2 decimal places (pounds and pence), so we add a point and 2 zeros.7 ÷ 2
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left. We write a decimal point and 2 zeros after the 7. They do not change its value, but they give us places to carry the remainder into.
2 7 . 0 0 - Divide the ones. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 2 = 3, remainder 1
Write 3 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 1 one becomes 10 tenths. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tenths. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tenths. With the 0 tenths there are 10 + 0 = 10 tenths.
10 ÷ 2: 5 × 2 = 10. Write 5 above the 0. - Divide the hundredths. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 hundredths.
0 ÷ 2 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so the division is exact. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right. The point in the answer is straight above the point in the bus stop.
3 . 5 0 2 7 . 10 0
7 ÷ 2 = 3.5 - Write the answer in pounds and pence. Give the answer to 2 decimal places.£3.50
Check. £3.50 × 2 = £7. ✓
Watch out. Write money with 2 decimal places: £3.50, not £3.5.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Divide the pounds. If there is a remainder, carry on dividing into tenths and hundredths (10p and 1p).
- Choose the operation. £18 is shared equally between 8, so divide by 8. Money needs 2 decimal places (pounds and pence), so we add a point and 2 zeros.18 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left. We write a decimal point and 2 zeros after the 18. They do not change its value, but they give us places to carry the remainder into.
8 1 8 . 0 0 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 8: 1 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 ten for 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 8: 2 × 8 = 16, and 18 − 16 = 2. Write 2 above the 8.
Exchange: 2 ones become 20 tenths. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tenths. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tenths. With the 0 tenths there are 20 + 0 = 20 tenths.
20 ÷ 8: 2 × 8 = 16, and 20 − 16 = 4. Write 2 above the 0.
Exchange: 4 tenths become 40 hundredths. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the hundredths. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 hundredths. With the 0 hundredths there are 40 + 0 = 40 hundredths.
40 ÷ 8: 5 × 8 = 40. Write 5 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so the division is exact. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right. The point in the answer is straight above the point in the bus stop.
0 2 . 2 5 8 1 18 . 20 40
18 ÷ 8 = 2.25 - Write the answer in pounds and pence. Give the answer to 2 decimal places.£2.25
Check. £2.25 × 8 = £18. ✓
Watch out. Write money with 2 decimal places: £3.50, not £3.5.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Look at the bar model. The orange box is the part that is left over.
- Count the full boxes. There are 8 boxes of 9 cm. The dots in the picture stand for the boxes in between.75 ÷ 9 = 8 remainder 3
- Say what the orange box is. It is the part that is not long enough for another full strip.
0 8 r 3 9 7 75
75 ÷ 9 = 8 r 3
Check. 8 × 9 = 72 and 72 + 3 = 75. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is smaller than 9.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 75 into groups of 9. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 9 fit into 75, so divide.75 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 7 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 9: 7 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 7 tens for 70 ones. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 5 ones there are 70 + 5 = 75 ones.
75 ÷ 9: 8 × 9 = 72, and 75 − 72 = 3. Write 8 above the 5.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 r 3 9 7 75
75 ÷ 9 = 8 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. 75 ÷ 9 = 8 remainder 3: that is 8 full bows and 3 cm left over.8 full bows + 3 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full bows count. The 3 left over cannot make another one. We round the answer down (we ignore the remainder).8 full bows
- Write the answer. Include the unit.8 bows
Check. 8 × 9 = 72 and 72 + 3 = 75. ✓
Watch out. Do not round up here: the extra bow would not be full.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. The left-over piece is the remainder.
- Find the remainder. 75 ÷ 9 = 8 remainder 3, so 8 pieces of 9 cm are cut and some ribbon is left.75 − 8 × 9 = 75 − 72 = 3
- Write the answer with the unit. The remainder is in the same unit as the ribbon, centimetres.3 cm
Check. 72 + 3 = 75. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is smaller than 9 cm.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 150 into groups of 7. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 7 fit into 150, so divide.150 ÷ 7
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 1 5 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 7: 1 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 5 tens there are 10 + 5 = 15 tens.
15 ÷ 7: 2 × 7 = 14, and 15 − 14 = 1. Write 2 above the 5.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 0 ones there are 10 + 0 = 10 ones.
10 ÷ 7: 1 × 7 = 7, and 10 − 7 = 3. Write 1 above the 0.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 1 r 3 7 1 15 10
150 ÷ 7 = 21 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. 150 ÷ 7 = 21 remainder 3: that is 21 full taxis and 3 people left over.21 full taxis + 3 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 3 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more taxi is needed. We round the answer up.21 + 1 = 22
- Write the answer. Include the unit.22 taxis
Check. 21 × 7 = 147 and 147 + 3 = 150. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 3 left over would have no taxi.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Share the pencils equally, so divide by 9.
- Divide. Use short division.
0 2 2 r 2 9 2 20 20
200 ÷ 9 = 22 r 2 - Read the answer. The whole number part is the amount each group gets. The remainder is what is left over.Each group gets 22 pencils. There are 2 left over.
Check. 22 × 9 = 198 and 198 + 2 = 200. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is smaller than 9.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Share the pencils equally, so divide by 9.
- Divide. Use short division.
0 2 2 r 2 9 2 20 20
200 ÷ 9 = 22 r 2 - Read the answer. The whole number part is the amount each group gets. The remainder is what is left over.Each group gets 22 pencils. There are 2 left over.
Check. 22 × 9 = 198 and 198 + 2 = 200. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is smaller than 9.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide to find the whole number and the remainder. The remainder can be written as a fraction (remainder over divisor) or carried on as a decimal.
- Divide with a remainder. First divide as usual and find the remainder.
2 r 1 2 5
5 ÷ 2 = 2 remainder 1 - Write the remainder as a fraction. The 1 left over is shared into 2 equal parts, so each share gets 12 of one more.12
5 ÷ 2 = 2 r 1 = 212 - Write the remainder as a decimal. Add a point and 1 zero, and carry on dividing. The 1 left over becomes 10 tenths.
2 . 5 2 5 . 10
5 ÷ 2 = 2.5 - Write all three answers. They all mean the same amount.2 r 1 = 212 = 2.5
Check. 2.5 × 2 = 5. ✓
Watch out. The fraction is the remainder over the divisor, not over the original number.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Work out the correct answer yourself first. Then compare it with the answer in the question to find the mistake.
- Work it out carefully. Do the question again, one step at a time.100 ÷ 6 = 16 remainder 4
The 4 left over need another box, so round UP: 17. - Compare with the answer in the question. Zoe wrote “16 boxes”.
- Find the mistake. Zoe divided correctly but used the remainder in the wrong way. The 4 left over would have nowhere to go.
- Write the correct answer. The correct answer is 17 boxes.
Check. 16 × 6 + 4 = 100. ✓
Watch out. After dividing, read the question again: do you need to round up, round down, or use the remainder?
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Look at the key words in the question. They tell you what to do with the remainder.
- Find the key words. Read the question again. The key words show what to do with the remainder.“How many are needed?”
- Decide. Everyone or everything must be included, so a part-filled group still needs a whole one.We round up.
- Try it. An example makes it clear.coaches needed: 230 ÷ 50 = 4 r 30, so 5 coaches
Check. Read the question again and see if your answer makes sense.
Watch out. Always read the question again after you divide: the remainder means different things in different stories.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Look at the key words in the question. They tell you what to do with the remainder.
- Find the key words. Read the question again. The key words show what to do with the remainder.“how many can she buy?”
- Decide. Only complete (full) groups count, so ignore the remainder.We round down.
- Try it. An example makes it clear.20 ÷ 3 = 6 r 2, so 6 packs
Check. Read the question again and see if your answer makes sense.
Watch out. Always read the question again after you divide: the remainder means different things in different stories.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Look at the key words in the question. They tell you what to do with the remainder.
- Find the key words. Read the question again. The key words show what to do with the remainder.“how many are left over?”
- Decide. The question asks for what is left over, which is the remainder itself.We use the remainder.
- Try it. An example makes it clear.47 ÷ 5 = 9 r 2, so 2 sweets
Check. Read the question again and see if your answer makes sense.
Watch out. Always read the question again after you divide: the remainder means different things in different stories.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Look at the key words in the question. They tell you what to do with the remainder.
- Find the key words. Read the question again. The key words show what to do with the remainder.“How many are needed?”
- Decide. Everyone or everything must be included, so a part-filled group still needs a whole one.We round up.
- Try it. An example makes it clear.130 ÷ 40 = 3 r 10, so 4 buses
Check. Read the question again and see if your answer makes sense.
Watch out. Always read the question again after you divide: the remainder means different things in different stories.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.3 ÷ 5 = 0 r 3 and 3 is odd.
8 ÷ 5 = 1 r 3 and 8 is even. - Look for one that does not work. One example that breaks the rule is called a counter-example.8 is even and leaves a remainder of 3 when divided by 5.
- Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.The numbers 3, 8, 13, 18, 23… all leave remainder 3. They go odd, even, odd, even, so it depends on the number.
- Decide. Sometimes
Check. We found one example each way. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.7 ÷ 2 = 3 r 1
15 ÷ 2 = 7 r 1
101 ÷ 2 = 50 r 1 - Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.An even number is exactly 2 times something. A number that leaves remainder 1 is one more than a multiple of 2. That is odd. And every odd number leaves remainder 1.
- Decide. Always
Check. Every odd number we tried had remainder 1. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Use one clue at a time. The first clue gives a list of possible numbers. The next clue removes some of them.
- Use the first clue to list the possible numbers. Numbers that leave remainder 3 when divided by 8 are 3 more than a multiple of 8.51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99
- Use the next clue: remainder 2 when divided by 5. Divide each possible number and keep the ones with the right remainder.
Number Division Remainder 2? 51 51 ÷ 5 = 10 r 1 no 59 59 ÷ 5 = 11 r 4 no 67 67 ÷ 5 = 13 r 2 yes 75 75 ÷ 5 = 15 r 0 no 83 83 ÷ 5 = 16 r 3 no 91 91 ÷ 5 = 18 r 1 no 99 99 ÷ 5 = 19 r 4 no - Write the number. Only one number is left.The number is 67.
Check. 67 ÷ 8 = 8 remainder 3
67 ÷ 5 = 13 remainder 2
All the clues are true. ✓
Watch out. A remainder is always smaller than the number you divide by.
Sharing, grouping, scaling and rates
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Division has two meanings. Sharing: you know how many groups there are, and you find how many go in each group. 12 counters shared between 4 plates gives 12 ÷ 4 = 3 on each plate. Grouping: you know how many are in each group, and you find how many groups you can make. 12 counters put into groups of 3 gives 12 ÷ 3 = 4 groups. It is the same sum with a different story.
Scaling. “A fifth as long” means divide by 5. “How many times as long?” asks how many groups of the short length fit into the long length, so divide the longer by the shorter: a 72 cm rope is 72 ÷ 9 = 8 times as long as a 9 cm rope.
Rates. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km every hour. The word per means “for each” and tells you to divide. If 4 pens cost £12, then 1 pen costs £12 ÷ 4 = £3. If the rate stays the same, you can divide both amounts by the same number, or find the amount for 1 and then multiply.
| ÷ 4 → | × 10 → | ||||
| Pens | 4 | 1 | 10 | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Cost | £12 | £3 | £30 | ||
| ÷ 4 → | × 10 → |
Key ideas
- Sharing: you know the number of groups. Grouping: you know the size of each group. Both are divisions.
- “A fifth as long”: divide by 5. “How many times as long”: divide the longer by the shorter.
- Price of one = total price ÷ number of items. Work in pence to avoid decimals, then change back.
- Per means for each: 392 km in 7 hours is 392 ÷ 7 = 56 km per hour.
- To scale a rate down, divide both amounts by the same number.
Key words. Sharing means splitting an amount into equal groups when you know how many groups there are. Grouping means finding how many groups of a given size you can make. Both are division.
Method. Sharing means you know the number of groups. Grouping means you know the size of each group. Either way, you divide.
- Is it sharing or grouping? Read the story. Does it tell us how many groups, or how big each group is?The pupils are split into 6 equal classs. We know the number of classs and want to find how many pupils go in each. This is sharing.
- Draw a bar model. The bar shows the whole amount split into equal parts.
- Choose the operation. Both sharing and grouping are division.252 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 2 5 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 6: 2 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 5 tens there are 20 + 5 = 25 tens.
25 ÷ 6: 4 × 6 = 24, and 25 − 24 = 1. Write 4 above the 5.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12. Write 2 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 2 6 2 25 12
252 ÷ 6 = 42 - Write the answer. Say whether it was sharing or grouping.Sharing: 42 pupils in each class
Check. 42 × 6 = 252. ✓
Watch out. The calculation is the same for sharing and grouping. The difference is in what the answer means.
Key words. Sharing means splitting an amount into equal groups when you know how many groups there are. Grouping means finding how many groups of a given size you can make. Both are division.
Method. Sharing means you know the number of groups. Grouping means you know the size of each group. Either way, you divide.
- Is it sharing or grouping? Read the story. Does it tell us how many groups, or how big each group is?Each pack has 6 pencils. We know the size of each pack and want to find how many packs can be made. This is grouping.
- Draw a bar model. The bar shows the whole amount split into equal parts.
- Choose the operation. Both sharing and grouping are division.168 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 1 6 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 6 tens there are 10 + 6 = 16 tens.
16 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12, and 16 − 12 = 4. Write 2 above the 6.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 8 ones there are 40 + 8 = 48 ones.
48 ÷ 6: 8 × 6 = 48. Write 8 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 8 6 1 16 48
168 ÷ 6 = 28 - Write the answer. Say whether it was sharing or grouping.Grouping: 28 packs
Check. 28 × 6 = 168. ✓
Watch out. The calculation is the same for sharing and grouping. The difference is in what the answer means.
Key words. Scaling means making an amount bigger or smaller. “A quarter as long” means divide by 4. “How many times as long” means divide the longer by the shorter.
Method. “A fifth as much” means divide by 5.
- Draw a bar model. Rope A is split into 5 equal parts. Rope B is 1 of those parts.
- Choose the operation. A fifth as much means splitting into 5 equal parts and taking one part, so divide by 5.360 m ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 3 6 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 5: 3 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 hundreds for 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 6 tens there are 30 + 6 = 36 tens.
36 ÷ 5: 7 × 5 = 35, and 36 − 35 = 1. Write 7 above the 6.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 0 ones there are 10 + 0 = 10 ones.
10 ÷ 5: 2 × 5 = 10. Write 2 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 2 5 3 36 10
360 ÷ 5 = 72 - Write the answer. Include the unit.72 m
Check. 5 × 72 m = 360 m. ✓
Watch out. “A fifth as long” makes the amount smaller: divide. “5 times as long” makes it bigger: multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making an amount bigger or smaller. “A quarter as long” means divide by 4. “How many times as long” means divide the longer by the shorter.
Method. “How many times as big?” asks how many groups of the smaller amount fit into the bigger amount, so divide.
- Draw a bar model. Mia’s amount is 1 box. We count how many boxes of that size make Tom’s amount.
- Choose the operation. To find how many times as big, divide the bigger amount by the smaller amount. (This is grouping: how many 9s are in 72?)72 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 7 2 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 9: 7 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 7 tens for 70 ones. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 2 ones there are 70 + 2 = 72 ones.
72 ÷ 9: 8 × 9 = 72. Write 8 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 9 7 72
72 ÷ 9 = 8 - Write the answer. 8 times as many
Check. 8 × 9 = 72. ✓
Watch out. Divide the bigger amount by the smaller one, not the other way round.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Divide the total cost by the number of items to find the cost of one.
- Choose the operation. 4 pens cost £12.00 altogether. The cost of one is the total shared equally between 4.£12.00 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 1 2 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 4: 1 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 ten for 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12. Write 3 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 3 4 1 12
12 ÷ 4 = 3 - Write the answer. Include the pound sign.£3 for 1 pen
Check. £3 × 4 = £12. ✓
Watch out. Cost of one is always less than the total. Divide the total by the number of items.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Use a table. Divide both amounts by the same number and the rate stays the same.
- Put the facts in a table. 20 pens go with £35. We want to know about 4 pens.
÷ 5 → Pens 20 4 Cost £35 ? ÷ 5 → - Find the scale factor. Look at the top row. What do we divide 20 by to get 4?20 ÷ 5 = 4, so divide by 5
- Divide the bottom row by 5 as well. The rate stays the same only if both rows are divided by the same number.£35 ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 3 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 5: 3 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 tens for 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 5: 7 × 5 = 35. Write 7 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 5 3 35
35 ÷ 5 = 7 - Write the answer. £7
Check. £7 × 5 = £35. ✓
Watch out. Divide the top and the bottom by the SAME number.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Find the cost of one first (divide), then multiply to find the cost of the number you want.
- Put the facts in a table. Find the cost of 1 first. Then scale up.
÷ 4 → × 10 → Pens 4 1 10 Cost £6 ? ? ÷ 4 → × 10 → - Find the cost of 1. Divide the cost of 4 pens by 4.600p ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 6 0 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 6.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 0 tens there are 20 + 0 = 20 tens.
20 ÷ 4: 5 × 4 = 20. Write 5 above the 0. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 4 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 5 0 4 6 20 0
600 ÷ 4 = 150 - Multiply by 10. Now find the cost of 10: 10 lots of one.150p × 10 = 1,500p
- Write the answer. Change to pounds if the number of pence is 100 or more.£15
Check. 1,500p ÷ 10 = 150p, and 150p × 4 = 600p. ✓
Watch out. Pence or pounds? Keep the same unit all the way through, then change at the end.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. To find a rate, divide the total amount by the number of hours.
- Choose the operation. “A train travels 392 km in 7 hours at the same speed” asks for the amount for one hour. The word “per” means “for each”, so divide the total by the number of hours.392 km ÷ 7 hours
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 3 9 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 7: 3 is smaller than 7, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 hundreds for 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 9 tens there are 30 + 9 = 39 tens.
39 ÷ 7: 5 × 7 = 35, and 39 − 35 = 4. Write 5 above the 9.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 2 ones there are 40 + 2 = 42 ones.
42 ÷ 7: 6 × 7 = 42. Write 6 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 5 6 7 3 39 42
392 ÷ 7 = 56 - Write the answer. Include the unit.56 km per hour
Check. 56 × 7 = 392. ✓
Watch out. Check that you divided the total by the number of units, not the other way round.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. To find a rate, divide the total amount by the number of litres.
- Choose the operation. “A car travels 288 km using 6 litres of petrol” asks for the amount for one litre. The word “per” means “for each”, so divide the total by the number of litres.288 km ÷ 6 litres
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 2 8 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 6: 2 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 8 tens there are 20 + 8 = 28 tens.
28 ÷ 6: 4 × 6 = 24, and 28 − 24 = 4. Write 4 above the 8.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 8 ones there are 40 + 8 = 48 ones.
48 ÷ 6: 8 × 6 = 48. Write 8 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 8 6 2 28 48
288 ÷ 6 = 48 - Write the answer. Include the unit.48 km per litre
Check. 48 × 6 = 288. ✓
Watch out. Check that you divided the total by the number of units, not the other way round.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Work out the price of one item in each pack. The pack with the lower price for one item is the best buy.
- Find the price of one in each pack. To compare fairly, we need the same amount of each. Work out the price of ONE pencil. Work in pence.Pack A: £1.50 = 150p for 6
Pack B: £1.84 = 184p for 8 - Pack A: divide 150p by 6. Price of one = price of the pack ÷ number in the pack.
0 2 5 6 1 15 30
150p ÷ 6 = 25p - Pack B: divide 184p by 8.
0 2 3 8 1 18 24
184p ÷ 8 = 23p - Compare. The smaller price for one is the better value.25p > 23p, so Pack B is better value.
Check. Pack A: 25p × 6 = 150p. Pack B: 23p × 8 = 184p. ✓
Watch out. The bigger pack is not always cheaper per item. Work it out.
Watch out
Divide the right way round. “Cost of one pen” is the total cost divided by the number of pens: £12 ÷ 4, not 4 ÷ £12. And for “how many times as long” divide the longer by the shorter. When you scale a rate down, divide both amounts: 20 pens for £35 becomes 4 pens for £7, not 4 pens for £35.Exercise 5F Sharing, grouping, scaling and rates
Non-calculatorKey words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 4 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 96 is shared equally between 4, so divide by 4.96 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 9 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 4 = 2, remainder 1
Write 2 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 6 ones there are 10 + 6 = 16 ones.
16 ÷ 4: 4 × 4 = 16. Write 4 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 4 4 9 16
96 ÷ 4 = 24 - Write the answer. Include the unit.24 sweets
Check. Multiply back: 24 × 4 = 20 × 4 + 4 × 4 = 80 + 16 = 96. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 5 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 415 is shared equally between 5, so divide by 5.415 ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 4 1 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 5: 4 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 hundreds for 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 1 tens there are 40 + 1 = 41 tens.
41 ÷ 5: 8 × 5 = 40, and 41 − 40 = 1. Write 8 above the 1.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 5 ones there are 10 + 5 = 15 ones.
15 ÷ 5: 3 × 5 = 15. Write 3 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 3 5 4 41 15
415 ÷ 5 = 83 - Write the answer. Include the unit.83 stamps
Check. Multiply back: 83 × 5 = 80 × 5 + 3 × 5 = 400 + 15 = 415. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 5, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. There are 6 equal shares. Each share is the same size.
- Choose the operation. 1,368 is shared equally between 6, so divide by 6.1,368 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 1 3 6 8 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 thousand for 10 hundreds. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 hundreds. With the 3 hundreds there are 10 + 3 = 13 hundreds.
13 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12, and 13 − 12 = 1. Write 2 above the 3.
Exchange: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 6 tens there are 10 + 6 = 16 tens.
16 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12, and 16 − 12 = 4. Write 2 above the 6.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 8 ones there are 40 + 8 = 48 ones.
48 ÷ 6: 8 × 6 = 48. Write 8 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 2 8 6 1 13 16 48
1,368 ÷ 6 = 228 - Write the answer. Include the unit.228 seats
Check. Multiply back: 228 × 6 = 200 × 6 + 20 × 6 + 8 × 6 = 1,200 + 120 + 48 = 1,368. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 6, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is a group of 7. We count how many boxes make 84.
- Choose the operation. We find how many groups of 7 fit into 84, so divide by 7.84 ÷ 7
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 8 4 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 7 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 4 ones there are 10 + 4 = 14 ones.
14 ÷ 7: 2 × 7 = 14. Write 2 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 7 8 14
84 ÷ 7 = 12 - Write the answer. Include the unit.12 bags
Check. Multiply back: 12 × 7 = 10 × 7 + 2 × 7 = 70 + 14 = 84. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is a group of 8. We count how many boxes make 456.
- Choose the operation. We find how many groups of 8 fit into 456, so divide by 8.456 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 4 5 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 8: 4 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 hundreds for 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 5 tens there are 40 + 5 = 45 tens.
45 ÷ 8: 5 × 8 = 40, and 45 − 40 = 5. Write 5 above the 5.
Exchange: 5 tens become 50 ones. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 6 ones there are 50 + 6 = 56 ones.
56 ÷ 8: 7 × 8 = 56. Write 7 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 5 7 8 4 45 56
456 ÷ 8 = 57 - Write the answer. Include the unit.57 rows
Check. Multiply back: 57 × 8 = 50 × 8 + 7 × 8 = 400 + 56 = 456. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 8, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is a group of 9. We count how many boxes make 2,250.
- Choose the operation. We find how many groups of 9 fit into 2,250, so divide by 9.2,250 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 2 2 5 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 9: 2 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 thousands for 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 2 hundreds there are 20 + 2 = 22 hundreds.
22 ÷ 9: 2 × 9 = 18, and 22 − 18 = 4. Write 2 above the 2.
Exchange: 4 hundreds become 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 5 tens there are 40 + 5 = 45 tens.
45 ÷ 9: 5 × 9 = 45. Write 5 above the 5. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 9 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 5 0 9 2 22 45 0
2,250 ÷ 9 = 250 - Write the answer. Include the unit.250 trips
Check. Multiply back: 250 × 9 = 200 × 9 + 50 × 9 = 1,800 + 450 = 2,250. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 250 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Sharing means splitting an amount into equal groups when you know how many groups there are. Grouping means finding how many groups of a given size you can make. Both are division.
Method. Sharing means you know the number of groups. Grouping means you know the size of each group. Either way, you divide.
- Is it sharing or grouping? Read the story. Does it tell us how many groups, or how big each group is?The pencils are split into 8 equal pots. We know the number of pots and want to find how many pencils go in each. This is sharing.
- Draw a bar model. The bar shows the whole amount split into equal parts.
- Choose the operation. Both sharing and grouping are division.240 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 2 4 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 8: 2 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 4 tens there are 20 + 4 = 24 tens.
24 ÷ 8: 3 × 8 = 24. Write 3 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 8 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 3 0 8 2 24 0
240 ÷ 8 = 30 - Write the answer. Say whether it was sharing or grouping.Sharing: 30 pencils in each pot
Check. 30 × 8 = 240. ✓
Watch out. The calculation is the same for sharing and grouping. The difference is in what the answer means.
Key words. Sharing means splitting an amount into equal groups when you know how many groups there are. Grouping means finding how many groups of a given size you can make. Both are division.
Method. Sharing means you know the number of groups. Grouping means you know the size of each group. Either way, you divide.
- Is it sharing or grouping? Read the story. Does it tell us how many groups, or how big each group is?Each page has 5 stickers. We know the size of each page and want to find how many pages can be made. This is grouping.
- Draw a bar model. The bar shows the whole amount split into equal parts.
- Choose the operation. Both sharing and grouping are division.135 ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 1 3 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 5: 1 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 3 tens there are 10 + 3 = 13 tens.
13 ÷ 5: 2 × 5 = 10, and 13 − 10 = 3. Write 2 above the 3.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 5: 7 × 5 = 35. Write 7 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 7 5 1 13 35
135 ÷ 5 = 27 - Write the answer. Say whether it was sharing or grouping.Grouping: 27 pages
Check. 27 × 5 = 135. ✓
Watch out. The calculation is the same for sharing and grouping. The difference is in what the answer means.
Key words. Sharing means splitting an amount into equal groups when you know how many groups there are. Grouping means finding how many groups of a given size you can make. Both are division.
Method. Sharing means you know the number of groups. Grouping means you know the size of each group. Either way, you divide.
- Is it sharing or grouping? Read the story. Does it tell us how many groups, or how big each group is?Each tray has 6 eggs. We know the size of each tray and want to find how many trays can be made. This is grouping.
- Draw a bar model. The bar shows the whole amount split into equal parts.
- Choose the operation. Both sharing and grouping are division.672 ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 6 7 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 6 = 1
Write 1 above the 6. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 7 tens.
7 ÷ 6: 1 × 6 = 6, and 7 − 6 = 1. Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12. Write 2 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 1 2 6 6 7 12
672 ÷ 6 = 112 - Write the answer. Say whether it was sharing or grouping.Grouping: 112 trays
Check. 112 × 6 = 672. ✓
Watch out. The calculation is the same for sharing and grouping. The difference is in what the answer means.
Key words. Scaling means making an amount bigger or smaller. “A quarter as long” means divide by 4. “How many times as long” means divide the longer by the shorter.
Method. “A sixth as much” means divide by 6.
- Draw a bar model. Tank is split into 6 equal parts. Jug is 1 of those parts.
- Choose the operation. A sixth as much means splitting into 6 equal parts and taking one part, so divide by 6.480 litres ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 4 8 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 6: 4 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 hundreds for 40 tens. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 8 tens there are 40 + 8 = 48 tens.
48 ÷ 6: 8 × 6 = 48. Write 8 above the 8. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 6 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 0 6 4 48 0
480 ÷ 6 = 80 - Write the answer. Include the unit.80 litres
Check. 6 × 80 litres = 480 litres. ✓
Watch out. “A fifth as long” makes the amount smaller: divide. “5 times as long” makes it bigger: multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making an amount bigger or smaller. “A quarter as long” means divide by 4. “How many times as long” means divide the longer by the shorter.
Method. “An eighth as much” means divide by 8.
- Draw a bar model. Large bag is split into 8 equal parts. Small bag is 1 of those parts.
- Choose the operation. An eighth as much means splitting into 8 equal parts and taking one part, so divide by 8.640 g ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 6 4 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 8: 6 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 6 hundreds for 60 tens. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 tens. With the 4 tens there are 60 + 4 = 64 tens.
64 ÷ 8: 8 × 8 = 64. Write 8 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 8 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 0 8 6 64 0
640 ÷ 8 = 80 - Write the answer. Include the unit.80 g
Check. 8 × 80 g = 640 g. ✓
Watch out. “A fifth as long” makes the amount smaller: divide. “5 times as long” makes it bigger: multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making an amount bigger or smaller. “A quarter as long” means divide by 4. “How many times as long” means divide the longer by the shorter.
Method. “Half as much” means divide by 2.
- Draw a bar model. Film is split into 2 equal parts. TV show is 1 of those parts.
- Choose the operation. Half as much means splitting into 2 equal parts and taking one part, so divide by 2.156 minutes ÷ 2
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
2 1 5 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 2: 1 is smaller than 2, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 5 tens there are 10 + 5 = 15 tens.
15 ÷ 2: 7 × 2 = 14, and 15 − 14 = 1. Write 7 above the 5.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 6 ones there are 10 + 6 = 16 ones.
16 ÷ 2: 8 × 2 = 16. Write 8 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 8 2 1 15 16
156 ÷ 2 = 78 - Write the answer. Include the unit.78 minutes
Check. 2 × 78 minutes = 156 minutes. ✓
Watch out. “A fifth as long” makes the amount smaller: divide. “5 times as long” makes it bigger: multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making an amount bigger or smaller. “A quarter as long” means divide by 4. “How many times as long” means divide the longer by the shorter.
Method. “How many times as big?” asks how many groups of the smaller amount fit into the bigger amount, so divide.
- Draw a bar model. The wall’s amount is 1 box. We count how many boxes of that size make The tower’s amount.
- Choose the operation. To find how many times as big, divide the bigger amount by the smaller amount. (This is grouping: how many 9s are in 72?)72 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 7 2 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 9: 7 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 7 tens for 70 ones. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 2 ones there are 70 + 2 = 72 ones.
72 ÷ 9: 8 × 9 = 72. Write 8 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 9 7 72
72 ÷ 9 = 8 - Write the answer. 8 times as big
Check. 8 × 9 = 72. ✓
Watch out. Divide the bigger amount by the smaller one, not the other way round.
Key words. Scaling means making an amount bigger or smaller. “A quarter as long” means divide by 4. “How many times as long” means divide the longer by the shorter.
Method. “How many times as big?” asks how many groups of the smaller amount fit into the bigger amount, so divide.
- Choose the operation. To find how many times as big, divide the bigger amount by the smaller amount. (This is grouping: how many 9s are in 360?)360 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 3 6 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 9: 3 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 hundreds for 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 6 tens there are 30 + 6 = 36 tens.
36 ÷ 9: 4 × 9 = 36. Write 4 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 9 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 0 9 3 36 0
360 ÷ 9 = 40 - Write the answer. 40 times as big
Check. 40 × 9 = 360. ✓
Watch out. Divide the bigger amount by the smaller one, not the other way round.
Key words. Scaling means making an amount bigger or smaller. “A quarter as long” means divide by 4. “How many times as long” means divide the longer by the shorter.
Method. “How many times as big?” asks how many groups of the smaller amount fit into the bigger amount, so divide.
- Choose the operation. To find how many times as big, divide the bigger amount by the smaller amount. (This is grouping: how many 7s are in 84?)84 ÷ 7
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 8 4 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 7 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 4 ones there are 10 + 4 = 14 ones.
14 ÷ 7: 2 × 7 = 14. Write 2 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 7 8 14
84 ÷ 7 = 12 - Write the answer. 12 times as big
Check. 12 × 7 = 84. ✓
Watch out. Divide the bigger amount by the smaller one, not the other way round.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Change the total to pence, divide by the number of items, then change back to pounds if you need to.
- Change the price to pence. Working in pence means no decimal point. £1 = 100p, so multiply by 100.£6.00 = 600p
- Choose the operation. 8 pens cost 600p altogether. The cost of one is the total shared equally between 8.600p ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 6 0 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 8: 6 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 6 hundreds for 60 tens. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 tens. With the 0 tens there are 60 + 0 = 60 tens.
60 ÷ 8: 7 × 8 = 56, and 60 − 56 = 4. Write 7 above the 0.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 0 ones there are 40 + 0 = 40 ones.
40 ÷ 8: 5 × 8 = 40. Write 5 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 5 8 6 60 40
600 ÷ 8 = 75 - Write the answer. Include the unit.75p for 1 pen
Check. 75p × 8 = 600p. ✓
Watch out. Make sure your answer is in the right unit: pence or pounds.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Divide the total cost by the number of items to find the cost of one.
- Choose the operation. 5 notebooks cost £20.00 altogether. The cost of one is the total shared equally between 5.£20.00 ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 2 0 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 5: 2 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 tens for 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 0 ones there are 20 + 0 = 20 ones.
20 ÷ 5: 4 × 5 = 20. Write 4 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 5 2 20
20 ÷ 5 = 4 - Write the answer. Include the pound sign.£4 for 1 notebook
Check. £4 × 5 = £20. ✓
Watch out. Cost of one is always less than the total. Divide the total by the number of items.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Change the total to pence, divide by the number of items, then change back to pounds if you need to.
- Change the price to pence. Working in pence means no decimal point. £1 = 100p, so multiply by 100.£2.40 = 240p
- Choose the operation. 6 apples cost 240p altogether. The cost of one is the total shared equally between 6.240p ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 2 4 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 6: 2 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 4 tens there are 20 + 4 = 24 tens.
24 ÷ 6: 4 × 6 = 24. Write 4 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 6 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 0 6 2 24 0
240 ÷ 6 = 40 - Write the answer. Include the unit.40p for 1 apple
Check. 40p × 6 = 240p. ✓
Watch out. Make sure your answer is in the right unit: pence or pounds.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Use a table. Divide both amounts by the same number and the rate stays the same.
- Put the facts in a table. 24 sandwiches go with £60. We want to know about 6 sandwiches.
÷ 4 → Sandwiches 24 6 Cost £60 ? ÷ 4 → - Find the scale factor. Look at the top row. What do we divide 24 by to get 6?24 ÷ 4 = 6, so divide by 4
- Divide the bottom row by 4 as well. The rate stays the same only if both rows are divided by the same number.£60 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 6 0 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 6.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 0 ones there are 20 + 0 = 20 ones.
20 ÷ 4: 5 × 4 = 20. Write 5 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 5 4 6 20
60 ÷ 4 = 15 - Write the answer. £15
Check. £15 × 4 = £60. ✓
Watch out. Divide the top and the bottom by the SAME number.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Use a table. Divide both amounts by the same number and the rate stays the same.
- Put the facts in a table. 15 oranges go with £6. We want to know about 5 oranges.
÷ 3 → Oranges 15 5 Cost £6 ? ÷ 3 → - Find the scale factor. Look at the top row. What do we divide 15 by to get 5?15 ÷ 3 = 5, so divide by 3
- Divide the bottom row by 3 as well. The rate stays the same only if both rows are divided by the same number.£6 ÷ 3
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 6 - Divide the ones. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 3 = 2
Write 2 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 3 6
6 ÷ 3 = 2 - Write the answer. £2
Check. £2 × 3 = £6. ✓
Watch out. Divide the top and the bottom by the SAME number.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Use a table. Divide both amounts by the same number and the rate stays the same.
- Put the facts in a table. 36 stickers go with £9. We want to know how many stickers go with £3.
÷ 3 → Stickers 36 ? Cost £9 £3 ÷ 3 → - Find the scale factor. Look at the bottom row. What do we divide £9 by to get £3?9 ÷ 3 = 3, so divide by 3
- Divide the top row by 3 as well. Both rows must be divided by the same number.36 ÷ 3
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 3 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 3 = 1
Write 1 above the 3. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 3: 2 × 3 = 6. Write 2 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 3 3 6
36 ÷ 3 = 12 - Write the answer. 12
Check. 12 × 3 = 36. ✓
Watch out. Divide the top and the bottom by the SAME number.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Find the cost of one first (divide), then multiply to find the cost of the number you want.
- Put the facts in a table. Find the cost of 1 first. Then scale up.
÷ 5 → × 8 → Buns 5 1 8 Cost £2 ? ? ÷ 5 → × 8 → - Find the cost of 1. Divide the cost of 5 buns by 5.200p ÷ 5
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 2 0 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 5: 2 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 0 tens there are 20 + 0 = 20 tens.
20 ÷ 5: 4 × 5 = 20. Write 4 above the 0. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 5 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 0 5 2 20 0
200 ÷ 5 = 40 - Multiply by 8. Now find the cost of 8: 8 lots of one.40p × 8 = 320p
- Write the answer. Change to pounds if the number of pence is 100 or more.£3.20
Check. 320p ÷ 8 = 40p, and 40p × 5 = 200p. ✓
Watch out. Pence or pounds? Keep the same unit all the way through, then change at the end.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Find the cost of one first (divide), then multiply to find the cost of the number you want.
- Put the facts in a table. Find the cost of 1 first. Then scale up.
÷ 6 → × 10 → Pencils 6 1 10 Cost 90p ? ? ÷ 6 → × 10 → - Find the cost of 1. Divide the cost of 6 pencils by 6.90p ÷ 6
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 9 0 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 0 ones there are 30 + 0 = 30 ones.
30 ÷ 6: 5 × 6 = 30. Write 5 above the 0.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 5 6 9 30
90 ÷ 6 = 15 - Multiply by 10. Now find the cost of 10: 10 lots of one.15p × 10 = 150p
- Write the answer. Change to pounds if the number of pence is 100 or more.£1.50
Check. 150p ÷ 10 = 15p, and 15p × 6 = 90p. ✓
Watch out. Pence or pounds? Keep the same unit all the way through, then change at the end.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. To find a rate, divide the total amount by the number of hours.
- Choose the operation. “A train travels 540 km in 6 hours” asks for the amount for one hour. The word “per” means “for each”, so divide the total by the number of hours.540 km ÷ 6 hours
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 5 4 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 6: 5 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 hundreds for 50 tens. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 tens. With the 4 tens there are 50 + 4 = 54 tens.
54 ÷ 6: 9 × 6 = 54. Write 9 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 6 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 0 6 5 54 0
540 ÷ 6 = 90 - Write the answer. Include the unit.90 km per hour
Check. 90 × 6 = 540. ✓
Watch out. Check that you divided the total by the number of units, not the other way round.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. To find a rate, divide the total amount by the number of litres.
- Choose the operation. “A car travels 392 km on 8 litres” asks for the amount for one litre. The word “per” means “for each”, so divide the total by the number of litres.392 km ÷ 8 litres
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 3 9 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 8: 3 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 hundreds for 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 9 tens there are 30 + 9 = 39 tens.
39 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32, and 39 − 32 = 7. Write 4 above the 9.
Exchange: 7 tens become 70 ones. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 2 ones there are 70 + 2 = 72 ones.
72 ÷ 8: 9 × 8 = 72. Write 9 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 9 8 3 39 72
392 ÷ 8 = 49 - Write the answer. Include the unit.49 km per litre
Check. 49 × 8 = 392. ✓
Watch out. Check that you divided the total by the number of units, not the other way round.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. To find a rate, divide the total amount by the number of minutes.
- Choose the operation. “A machine makes 2,160 bolts in 9 minutes” asks for the amount for one minute. The word “per” means “for each”, so divide the total by the number of minutes.2,160 bolts ÷ 9 minutes
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 2 1 6 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 9: 2 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 thousands for 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 1 hundreds there are 20 + 1 = 21 hundreds.
21 ÷ 9: 2 × 9 = 18, and 21 − 18 = 3. Write 2 above the 1.
Exchange: 3 hundreds become 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 6 tens there are 30 + 6 = 36 tens.
36 ÷ 9: 4 × 9 = 36. Write 4 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 9 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 4 0 9 2 21 36 0
2,160 ÷ 9 = 240 - Write the answer. Include the unit.240 bolts per minute
Check. 240 × 9 = 2,160. ✓
Watch out. Check that you divided the total by the number of units, not the other way round.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. To find a rate, divide the total amount by the number of seconds.
- Choose the operation. “A tap fills 4,500 ml in 5 seconds” asks for the amount for one second. The word “per” means “for each”, so divide the total by the number of seconds.4,500 ml ÷ 5 seconds
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 4 5 0 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 5: 4 is smaller than 5, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 thousands for 40 hundreds. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 hundreds. With the 5 hundreds there are 40 + 5 = 45 hundreds.
45 ÷ 5: 9 × 5 = 45. Write 9 above the 5. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 5 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 5 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 0 0 5 4 45 0 0
4,500 ÷ 5 = 900 - Write the answer. Include the unit.900 ml per second
Check. 900 × 5 = 4,500. ✓
Watch out. Check that you divided the total by the number of units, not the other way round.
| ÷ 4 → | × 7 → | ||||
| Pens | 4 | 1 | 7 | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Cost | £12 | ? | ? | ||
| ÷ 4 → | × 7 → |
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Divide the total cost by the number of items to find the cost of one.
- Choose the operation. 4 pens cost £12.00 altogether. The cost of one is the total shared equally between 4.£12.00 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 1 2 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 4: 1 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole ten. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 ten for 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12. Write 3 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 3 4 1 12
12 ÷ 4 = 3 - Write the answer. Include the pound sign.£3 for 1 pen
Check. £3 × 4 = £12. ✓
Watch out. Cost of one is always less than the total. Divide the total by the number of items.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Find the cost of one first (divide), then multiply to find the cost of the number you want.
- Put the facts in a table. Find the cost of 1 first. Then scale up.
÷ 4 → × 7 → Pens 4 1 7 Cost £12 ? ? ÷ 4 → × 7 → - Find the cost of 1. Divide the cost of 4 pens by 4.1,200p ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 1 2 0 0 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 4: 1 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 thousand for 10 hundreds. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 hundreds. With the 2 hundreds there are 10 + 2 = 12 hundreds.
12 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12. Write 3 above the 2. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 tens.
0 ÷ 4 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 4 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 3 0 0 4 1 12 0 0
1,200 ÷ 4 = 300 - Multiply by 7. Now find the cost of 7: 7 lots of one.300p × 7 = 2,100p
- Write the answer. Change to pounds if the number of pence is 100 or more.£21
Check. 2,100p ÷ 7 = 300p, and 300p × 4 = 1,200p. ✓
Watch out. Pence or pounds? Keep the same unit all the way through, then change at the end.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Work out the price of one item in each pack. The pack with the lower price for one item is the best buy.
- Find the price of one in each pack. To compare fairly, we need the same amount of each. Work out the price of ONE pencil. Work in pence.Pack A: £1.50 = 150p for 6
Pack B: £1.84 = 184p for 8 - Pack A: divide 150p by 6. Price of one = price of the pack ÷ number in the pack.
0 2 5 6 1 15 30
150p ÷ 6 = 25p - Pack B: divide 184p by 8.
0 2 3 8 1 18 24
184p ÷ 8 = 23p - Compare. The smaller price for one is the better value.25p > 23p, so Pack B is better value.
Check. Pack A: 25p × 6 = 150p. Pack B: 23p × 8 = 184p. ✓
Watch out. The bigger pack is not always cheaper per item. Work it out.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Work out the price of one item in each pack. The pack with the lower price for one item is the best buy.
- Find the price of one in each pack. To compare fairly, we need the same amount of each. Work out the price of ONE yoghurt. Work in pence.Box of 4: £1.80 = 180p for 4
Box of 6: £2.52 = 252p for 6 - Box of 4: divide 180p by 4. Price of one = price of the pack ÷ number in the pack.
0 4 5 4 1 18 20
180p ÷ 4 = 45p - Box of 6: divide 252p by 6.
0 4 2 6 2 25 12
252p ÷ 6 = 42p - Compare. The smaller price for one is the better value.45p > 42p, so Box of 6 is better value.
Check. Box of 4: 45p × 4 = 180p. Box of 6: 42p × 6 = 252p. ✓
Watch out. The bigger pack is not always cheaper per item. Work it out.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Use a table. Divide both amounts by the same number and the rate stays the same.
- Put the facts in a table. 24 biscuits go with 360 g. We want to know about 8 biscuits.
÷ 3 → Biscuits 24 8 Flour (g) 360 g ? ÷ 3 → - Find the scale factor. Look at the top row. What do we divide 24 by to get 8?24 ÷ 3 = 8, so divide by 3
- Divide the bottom row by 3 as well. The rate stays the same only if both rows are divided by the same number.360 g ÷ 3
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 3 6 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 3 = 1
Write 1 above the 3. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 tens.
6 ÷ 3: 2 × 3 = 6. Write 2 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 3 = 0. Write 0 above. This 0 is a place holder, and it must stay in the answer.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 0 3 3 6 0
360 ÷ 3 = 120 - Write the answer. 120 g
Check. 120 g × 3 = 360 g. ✓
Watch out. Divide the top and the bottom by the SAME number.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Work out the correct answer yourself first. Then compare it with the answer in the question to find the mistake.
- Work it out carefully. Do the question again, one step at a time.6 cakes cost £9. 3 cakes are half as many cakes, so they cost half as much.
900p ÷ 2 = 450p = £4.50 - Compare with the answer in the question. Ben wrote £18, which is more than the cost of 6 cakes. That cannot be right: fewer cakes should cost less.
- Find the mistake. Ben multiplied by 2 instead of dividing by 2. 3 is half of 6, so we divide the cost by 2.
- Write the correct answer. The correct answer is £4.50.
Check. £4.50 × 2 = £9. ✓
Watch out. Fewer items cost less, so the price gets smaller. Divide.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.12 ÷ 3 = 4 (smaller than 12)
100 ÷ 10 = 10 (smaller than 100)
5 ÷ 2 = 2 r 1 (2 is smaller than 5) - Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.When you share an amount into 2 or more equal parts, each part is smaller than the whole. So the whole-number answer is always smaller than the number you started with.
- Decide. Always
Check. Every answer was smaller. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.£12 for 4 pens: £3 for 1 pen (a whole number of pounds)
£10 for 4 pens: £2.50 for 1 pen (not a whole number of pounds) - Look for one that does not work. One example that breaks the rule is called a counter-example.£10 ÷ 4 = £2.50 is not a whole number of pounds.
- Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.It depends on whether the total divides exactly by the number of items.
- Decide. Sometimes
Check. We found one example each way. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Find the price of one pen. Divide the cost of the pack by the number of pens. Work in pence.£6.75 = 675p, and 675p ÷ 9 = 75p
- Find the price of one pencil. Divide the cost of the pack by the number of pencils.£3.60 = 360p, and 360p ÷ 6 = 60p
- Compare. The smaller price is the cheaper item. Find the difference by subtracting.75p > 60p, and 75p − 60p = 15p
- Write the answer. Include the unit.A pencil is cheaper, by 15p
Check. 75p × 9 = 675p and 60p × 6 = 360p. ✓
Watch out. Work out the price of ONE of each, then compare.
Combining operations, the equals sign and multi-step problems
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
When a calculation has more than one operation, the order matters. Look at 24 + 36 ÷ 4. If you add first you get 60 ÷ 4 = 15. But the correct answer is 33. The rule is: brackets first, then multiply and divide (from left to right), then add and subtract (from left to right). So 36 ÷ 4 = 9 comes first, and then 24 + 9 = 33. Brackets change the order. In (24 + 36) ÷ 4 the brackets say add first: 60 ÷ 4 = 15.
| Step | Do this | Example: 24 + 36 ÷ 4 |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | brackets | none |
| 2 | × and ÷, left to right | 36 ÷ 4 = 9, so 24 + 9 |
| 3 | + and −, left to right | 24 + 9 = 33 |
The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. It is not just a signal that the answer comes next. Both sides must balance, like a see-saw. In 56 ÷ 7 = 4 × [ ], the left side is 8, so the right side must be 8 too. What number multiplied by 4 makes 8? It is 2.
Multi-step problems. Read the story, draw a bar model, and work out one thing at a time. For example: a school buys 6 boxes of 24 pens and shares them equally between 8 classes. First find how many pens there are (6 × 24 = 144). Then share them (144 ÷ 8 = 18). Write down what each answer means.
Key ideas
- Order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
- Do one step at a time and write down each new line.
- The equals sign means “is the same value as”. Work out the side you can, then find the missing number that balances the other side with an inverse operation.
- For multi-step problems: draw a bar model, find the missing amounts one at a time, and check you have answered the question.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.24 + 36 ÷ 4 = 24 + 9
- Add. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.24 + 9 = 33
- Write the answer. 24 + 36 ÷ 4 = 33
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Work out the brackets first. Brackets always come first. Inside them, × and ÷ come before + and −.(24 + 36) ÷ 4 = 60 ÷ 4
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.60 ÷ 4 = 15
- Write the answer. (24 + 36) ÷ 4 = 15
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the multiplication. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.5 × 8 − 24 ÷ 6 = 40 − 24 ÷ 6
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.40 − 24 ÷ 6 = 40 − 4
- Subtract. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.40 − 4 = 36
- Write the answer. 5 × 8 − 24 ÷ 6 = 36
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.100 − 72 ÷ 8 × 3 = 100 − 9 × 3
- Do the multiplication. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.100 − 9 × 3 = 100 − 27
- Subtract. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.100 − 27 = 73
- Write the answer. 100 − 72 ÷ 8 × 3 = 73
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.56 ÷ 7 = 8
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 8. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. 4 times the missing number is 8. Undo the multiplication with a division.8 ÷ 4 = 2
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.2
Check. 4 × 2 = 8 and 56 ÷ 7 = 8. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.72 ÷ 8 = 9
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 9. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. The missing number divided by 5 is 9. Undo the division with a multiplication.9 × 5 = 45
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.45
Check. 45 ÷ 5 = 9 and 72 ÷ 8 = 9. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.3 × 5 = 15
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 15. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. 90 shared into groups of the missing size makes 15 groups, so the missing number is 90 divided by 15.90 ÷ 15 = 6
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.6
Check. 90 ÷ 6 = 15 and 3 × 5 = 15. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Try each place where brackets could go. Work out each one using the order of operations. Only one will give the answer.
- Work out the calculation with no brackets. Use the order of operations to see what we get now.30 + 6 ÷ 3 = 32, but we need 12
- Try each place for the brackets. Put the brackets round two numbers that are next to each other, and work out the answer.
With brackets Value = 12? (30 + 6) ÷ 3 12 yes 30 + (6 ÷ 3) 32 no - Pick the one that works. Only one gives the target.(30 + 6) ÷ 3 = 12
Check. (30 + 6) ÷ 3 = 12. ✓
Watch out. Brackets change which calculation is done first.
Key words. A bar model is a drawing that shows the amounts in a problem as bars, so you can see which calculation to do.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. 6 boxes of 24 pens, then the total is shared.
- Find the number of pens. 6 boxes with 24 pens in each, so multiply.6 × 24 = 144
- Share the pens. The pens are shared equally between 8 classes, so divide by 8.144 ÷ 8 = 18
- Write the answer. Include the unit.18 pens
Check. 18 × 8 = 144, and 144 = 6 × 24. ✓
Watch out. Do the multiplication first to find the total, then divide.
Key words. A bar model is a drawing that shows the amounts in a problem as bars, so you can see which calculation to do.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. The £100 is split into the cost of the books and the money that is left over.
- Find the cost of the books. 4 books at £12 each, so multiply.4 × 12 = 48
- Find how much is left. Take the cost of the books away from £100.100 − 48 = 52
- Share what is left. The money left is shared equally between 4 friends, so divide by 4.52 ÷ 4 = 13
- Write the answer. Include the unit.£13
Check. 13 × 4 = 52 and 52 + 48 = 100. ✓
Watch out. Read the question again: you want the amount for each friend, not the amount left.
Watch out
Do not work from left to right when there are mixed operations. 24 + 36 ÷ 4 is 33, not 15. The division comes first. And the equals sign is not an instruction to “work it out”: in 56 ÷ 7 = 4 × [ ] both sides must have the same value (8), so the missing number is 2, not 8.Exercise 5G Combining operations, the equals sign and multi-step problems
Non-calculatorKey words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.18 + 24 ÷ 6 = 18 + 4
- Add. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.18 + 4 = 22
- Write the answer. 18 + 24 ÷ 6 = 22
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.40 − 36 ÷ 9 = 40 − 4
- Subtract. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.40 − 4 = 36
- Write the answer. 40 − 36 ÷ 9 = 36
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the multiplication. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.7 × 4 + 56 ÷ 8 = 28 + 56 ÷ 8
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.28 + 56 ÷ 8 = 28 + 7
- Add. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.28 + 7 = 35
- Write the answer. 7 × 4 + 56 ÷ 8 = 35
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.60 ÷ 5 − 3 × 2 = 12 − 3 × 2
- Do the multiplication. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.12 − 3 × 2 = 12 − 6
- Subtract. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.12 − 6 = 6
- Write the answer. 60 ÷ 5 − 3 × 2 = 6
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Work out the brackets first. Brackets always come first. Inside them, × and ÷ come before + and −.(18 + 24) ÷ 6 = 42 ÷ 6
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.42 ÷ 6 = 7
- Write the answer. (18 + 24) ÷ 6 = 7
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Work out the brackets first. Brackets always come first. Inside them, × and ÷ come before + and −.(40 − 36) × 9 = 4 × 9
- Do the multiplication. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.4 × 9 = 36
- Write the answer. (40 − 36) × 9 = 36
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Work out the brackets first. Brackets always come first. Inside them, × and ÷ come before + and −.7 × (4 + 56 ÷ 8) = 7 × (4 + 7)
- Work out the brackets first. Brackets always come first. Inside them, × and ÷ come before + and −.7 × (4 + 7) = 7 × 11
- Do the multiplication. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.7 × 11 = 77
- Write the answer. 7 × (4 + 56 ÷ 8) = 77
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Work out the brackets first. Brackets always come first. Inside them, × and ÷ come before + and −.60 ÷ (5 + 7) = 60 ÷ 12
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.60 ÷ 12 = 5
- Write the answer. 60 ÷ (5 + 7) = 5
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.20 − 8 ÷ 4 = 20 − 2
- Subtract. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.20 − 2 = 18
- Write the answer. 20 − 8 ÷ 4 = 18
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Work out the brackets first. Brackets always come first. Inside them, × and ÷ come before + and −.(20 − 8) ÷ 4 = 12 ÷ 4
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.12 ÷ 4 = 3
- Write the answer. (20 − 8) ÷ 4 = 3
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.48 ÷ 6 = 8
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 8. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. 2 times the missing number is 8. Undo the multiplication with a division.8 ÷ 2 = 4
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.4
Check. 2 × 4 = 8 and 48 ÷ 6 = 8. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.72 ÷ 9 = 8
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 8. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. The missing number divided by 4 is 8. Undo the division with a multiplication.8 × 4 = 32
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.32
Check. 32 ÷ 4 = 8 and 72 ÷ 9 = 8. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.5 × 6 = 30
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 30. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. 60 shared into groups of the missing size makes 30 groups, so the missing number is 60 divided by 30.60 ÷ 30 = 2
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.2
Check. 60 ÷ 2 = 30 and 5 × 6 = 30. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.36 ÷ 4 = 9
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 9. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. 5 add the missing number makes 9. Undo the addition with a subtraction.9 − 5 = 4
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.4
Check. 5 + 4 = 9 and 36 ÷ 4 = 9. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.5 × 5 = 25
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 25. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. 60 take away the missing number leaves 25, so the missing number is what is taken away: 60 − 25.60 − 25 = 35
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.35
Check. 60 − 35 = 25 and 5 × 5 = 25. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.8 × 3 = 24
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 24. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. The missing number take away 7 leaves 24. Undo the subtraction with an addition.24 + 7 = 31
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.31
Check. 31 − 7 = 24 and 8 × 3 = 24. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. Work out the value of each side. The statement is true only if both sides have the same value.
- Work out the left side. Use the order of operations.48 ÷ 6 = 8
- Work out the right side. Do the same for the other side.4 × 2 = 8
- Compare. The equals sign says both sides have the same value.8 = 8: the statement is true
Check. Read the sentence back with the two values.
Watch out. The equals sign means “is the same value as”, not “the answer is”.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. Work out the value of each side. The statement is true only if both sides have the same value.
- Work out the left side. Use the order of operations.36 ÷ 4 + 2 = 9 + 2
9 + 2 = 11 - Work out the right side. Do the same for the other side.6 × 2 = 12
- Compare. The equals sign says both sides have the same value.11 ≠ 12: the statement is false
Check. Read the sentence back with the two values.
Watch out. The equals sign means “is the same value as”, not “the answer is”.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. Work out the value of each side. The statement is true only if both sides have the same value.
- Work out the left side. Use the order of operations.5 × 8 = 40
- Work out the right side. Do the same for the other side.80 ÷ 2 = 40
- Compare. The equals sign says both sides have the same value.40 = 40: the statement is true
Check. Read the sentence back with the two values.
Watch out. The equals sign means “is the same value as”, not “the answer is”.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. Work out the value of each side. The statement is true only if both sides have the same value.
- Work out the left side. Use the order of operations.72 ÷ 9 = 8
- Work out the right side. Do the same for the other side.2 × 3 + 3 = 6 + 3
6 + 3 = 9 - Compare. The equals sign says both sides have the same value.8 ≠ 9: the statement is false
Check. Read the sentence back with the two values.
Watch out. The equals sign means “is the same value as”, not “the answer is”.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Try each place where brackets could go. Work out each one using the order of operations. Only one will give the answer.
- Work out the calculation with no brackets. Use the order of operations to see what we get now.8 + 4 × 3 = 20, but we need 36
- Try each place for the brackets. Put the brackets round two numbers that are next to each other, and work out the answer.
With brackets Value = 36? (8 + 4) × 3 36 yes 8 + (4 × 3) 20 no - Pick the one that works. Only one gives the target.(8 + 4) × 3 = 36
Check. (8 + 4) × 3 = 36. ✓
Watch out. Brackets change which calculation is done first.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Try each place where brackets could go. Work out each one using the order of operations. Only one will give the answer.
- Work out the calculation with no brackets. Use the order of operations to see what we get now.48 ÷ 6 − 2 = 6, but we need 12
- Try each place for the brackets. Put the brackets round two numbers that are next to each other, and work out the answer.
With brackets Value = 12? (48 ÷ 6) − 2 6 no 48 ÷ (6 − 2) 12 yes - Pick the one that works. Only one gives the target.48 ÷ (6 − 2) = 12
Check. 48 ÷ (6 − 2) = 12. ✓
Watch out. Brackets change which calculation is done first.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Try every sign in every gap, in order. Use the order of operations to work out each one. Only one gives the answer.
- List the choices. There are 4 signs for each gap, so we try them all in an organised way.2 gaps, 4 signs each: 16 calculations
- Work each one out. Use the order of operations. A division must come out exactly. We want the answer 14.
36 + 4 + 5 = 45 36 + 4 − 5 = 35 36 + 4 × 5 = 56 36 + 4 ÷ 5 = no 36 − 4 + 5 = 37 36 − 4 − 5 = 27 36 − 4 × 5 = 16 36 − 4 ÷ 5 = no 36 × 4 + 5 = 149 36 × 4 − 5 = 139 36 × 4 × 5 = 720 36 × 4 ÷ 5 = no 36 ÷ 4 + 5 = 14 ✓ 36 ÷ 4 − 5 = 4 36 ÷ 4 × 5 = 45 36 ÷ 4 ÷ 5 = no - Pick the one that works. Only one of them gives the target.36 ÷ 4 + 5 = 14
Check. 36 ÷ 4 + 5 = 14. ✓
Watch out. Remember: × and ÷ are done before + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Try every sign in every gap, in order. Use the order of operations to work out each one. Only one gives the answer.
- List the choices. There are 4 signs for each gap, so we try them all in an organised way.2 gaps, 4 signs each: 16 calculations
- Work each one out. Use the order of operations. A division must come out exactly. We want the answer 8.
40 + 8 + 3 = 51 40 + 8 − 3 = 45 40 + 8 × 3 = 64 40 + 8 ÷ 3 = no 40 − 8 + 3 = 35 40 − 8 − 3 = 29 40 − 8 × 3 = 16 40 − 8 ÷ 3 = no 40 × 8 + 3 = 323 40 × 8 − 3 = 317 40 × 8 × 3 = 960 40 × 8 ÷ 3 = no 40 ÷ 8 + 3 = 8 ✓ 40 ÷ 8 − 3 = 2 40 ÷ 8 × 3 = 15 40 ÷ 8 ÷ 3 = no - Pick the one that works. Only one of them gives the target.40 ÷ 8 + 3 = 8
Check. 40 ÷ 8 + 3 = 8. ✓
Watch out. Remember: × and ÷ are done before + and −.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Try every sign in every gap, in order. Use the order of operations to work out each one. Only one gives the answer.
- List the choices. There are 4 signs for each gap, so we try them all in an organised way.2 gaps, 4 signs each: 16 calculations
- Work each one out. Use the order of operations. A division must come out exactly. We want the answer 12.
24 + 6 + 2 = 32 24 + 6 − 2 = 28 24 + 6 × 2 = 36 24 + 6 ÷ 2 = 27 24 − 6 + 2 = 20 24 − 6 − 2 = 16 24 − 6 × 2 = 12 ✓ 24 − 6 ÷ 2 = 21 24 × 6 + 2 = 146 24 × 6 − 2 = 142 24 × 6 × 2 = 288 24 × 6 ÷ 2 = 72 24 ÷ 6 + 2 = 6 24 ÷ 6 − 2 = 2 24 ÷ 6 × 2 = 8 24 ÷ 6 ÷ 2 = 2 - Pick the one that works. Only one of them gives the target.24 − 6 × 2 = 12
Check. 24 − 6 × 2 = 12. ✓
Watch out. Remember: × and ÷ are done before + and −.
Key words. A bar model is a drawing that shows the amounts in a problem as bars, so you can see which calculation to do.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Find the number of tins. 5 shelves of 36 tins, so multiply.5 × 36 = 180
- Put the tins into boxes. Boxes of 9 tins, so divide the total by 9.180 ÷ 9 = 20
- Write the answer. Include the unit.20 boxes
Check. Work backwards with the opposite operations to check.
Watch out. Do one step at a time and say what each answer means.
Key words. A bar model is a drawing that shows the amounts in a problem as bars, so you can see which calculation to do.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Find how many stickers are left. She gives 70 away, so subtract.250 − 70 = 180
- Share the rest. The stickers are shared equally between 6 friends, so divide by 6.180 ÷ 6 = 30
- Write the answer. Include the unit.30 stickers
Check. Work backwards with the opposite operations to check.
Watch out. Do one step at a time and say what each answer means.
Key words. A bar model is a drawing that shows the amounts in a problem as bars, so you can see which calculation to do.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Find the number of chairs. 8 rows of 45, so multiply.8 × 45 = 360
- Take away the chairs removed. 30 chairs are taken away.360 − 30 = 330
- Share into stacks. 5 equal stacks, so divide by 5.330 ÷ 5 = 66
- Write the answer. Include the unit.66 chairs
Check. Work backwards with the opposite operations to check.
Watch out. Do one step at a time and say what each answer means.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. The area of a rectangle is length × width. To find a missing side, divide the area by the side you know.
- Draw the rectangle. The area is 96 cm² and the length is 8 cm.
- Choose the operation. Area = length × width. Multiplying is undone by dividing, so width = area ÷ length.96 ÷ 8
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 9 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 8 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 6 ones there are 10 + 6 = 16 ones.
16 ÷ 8: 2 × 8 = 16. Write 2 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 8 9 16
96 ÷ 8 = 12 - Write the answer. Include the unit.12 cm
Check. 8 × 12 = 96. ✓
Watch out. The answer is a length in cm, not an area in cm².
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. Each box is one minute. 7 boxes make 1,260 pages.
- Find the pages printed in one minute. The same number is printed each minute, so divide by 7.1,260 ÷ 7 = 180
- Find the pages printed in 10 minutes. 10 minutes of 180 pages, so multiply by 10.180 × 10 = 1,800
- Write the answer. Include the unit.1,800 pages
Check. 180 × 7 = 1,260. ✓
Watch out. Find the amount for one minute first.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. 200 beads make 33 bracelets of 6 beads and 2 beads are left over.
- Find the number of bracelets. Each bracelet uses 6 beads, so divide 200 by 6 and ignore the remainder (only whole bracelets count).
0 3 3 r 2 6 2 20 20
200 ÷ 6 = 33 r 2, so 33 whole bracelets - Find the money. Each bracelet is sold for £3, so multiply by 3.33 × 3 = 99
- Write the answer. Include the unit.£99
Check. 33 × 6 = 198 and 198 + 2 = 200, and 33 × 3 = 99. ✓
Watch out. Round down: the 2 extra beads cannot make a whole bracelet.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Work out the correct answer yourself first. Then compare it with the answer in the question to find the mistake.
- Work it out carefully. Do the question again, one step at a time.Divide first: 36 ÷ 4 = 9. Then add: 24 + 9 = 33.
- Compare with the answer in the question. Zara wrote 15. She did 24 + 36 = 60 and then 60 ÷ 4 = 15.
- Find the mistake. Zara worked from left to right. But division comes before addition, so 36 ÷ 4 must be done first.
- Write the correct answer. The correct answer is 33.
Check. If she wanted to add first, the calculation needs brackets: (24 + 36) ÷ 4 = 15.
Watch out. Without brackets, × and ÷ are done before + and −.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.2 + 3 + 4 = 9 and 2 + (3 + 4) = 9 (brackets did not change it)
10 − 6 ÷ 2 = 7 and (10 − 6) ÷ 2 = 2 (brackets changed it) - Look for one that does not work. One example that breaks the rule is called a counter-example.(10 − 6) ÷ 2 = 2 but 10 − 6 ÷ 2 = 7.
- Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.Sometimes the brackets are around the part that would be done first anyway, so nothing changes. If they change the order, the answer can change.
- Decide. Sometimes
Check. We found one example each way. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. A counter-example is one example that shows a statement is false.
Method. Try some examples. If the statement is true for every example you can find, ask why. If you find one that is false, it cannot be “always”.
- Try some numbers. Test the statement with some examples.12 ÷ 6 = 2 and 12 ÷ 2 ÷ 3 = 6 ÷ 3 = 2
60 ÷ 6 = 10 and 60 ÷ 2 ÷ 3 = 30 ÷ 3 = 10
252 ÷ 6 = 42 and 252 ÷ 2 ÷ 3 = 126 ÷ 3 = 42 - Explain why. A reason shows what is happening for every number, not just the ones we tried.6 = 2 × 3, so dividing by 2 and then by 3 splits the number into 2 equal parts and then each part into 3. That is 6 equal parts altogether.
- Decide. Always
Check. All three examples matched. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means every time. “Sometimes” needs one example that works and one that does not. “Never” means no example works.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Work out the answer to every one. The odd one out has a different answer from the others.
- Work out each one. Use place value or a known fact.
Calculation Answer 3 × 4 12 48 ÷ 4 12 (20 + 4) ÷ 2 12 20 − 4 ÷ 2 18 - Find the odd one out. Three have the same answer, 12. One is different.20 − 4 ÷ 2 = 18
- Write the answer. The odd one out is 20 − 4 ÷ 2.
Check. The other three all equal 12. ✓
Watch out. Work out all of them. Do not decide from just the first two.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Try every sign in every gap, in order. Use the order of operations to work out each one. Only one gives the answer.
- List the choices. There are 4 signs for each gap, so we try them all in an organised way.3 gaps, 4 signs each: 64 calculations
- Work each one out. Use the order of operations. A division must come out exactly. We want the answer 14.
24 + 6 + 2 + 5 = 37 24 + 6 + 2 − 5 = 27 24 + 6 + 2 × 5 = 40 24 + 6 + 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 + 6 − 2 + 5 = 33 24 + 6 − 2 − 5 = 23 24 + 6 − 2 × 5 = 20 24 + 6 − 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 + 6 × 2 + 5 = 41 24 + 6 × 2 − 5 = 31 24 + 6 × 2 × 5 = 84 24 + 6 × 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 + 6 ÷ 2 + 5 = 32 24 + 6 ÷ 2 − 5 = 22 24 + 6 ÷ 2 × 5 = 39 24 + 6 ÷ 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 − 6 + 2 + 5 = 25 24 − 6 + 2 − 5 = 15 24 − 6 + 2 × 5 = 28 24 − 6 + 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 − 6 − 2 + 5 = 21 24 − 6 − 2 − 5 = 11 24 − 6 − 2 × 5 = 8 24 − 6 − 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 − 6 × 2 + 5 = 17 24 − 6 × 2 − 5 = 7 24 − 6 × 2 × 5 = no 24 − 6 × 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 − 6 ÷ 2 + 5 = 26 24 − 6 ÷ 2 − 5 = 16 24 − 6 ÷ 2 × 5 = 9 24 − 6 ÷ 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 × 6 + 2 + 5 = 151 24 × 6 + 2 − 5 = 141 24 × 6 + 2 × 5 = 154 24 × 6 + 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 × 6 − 2 + 5 = 147 24 × 6 − 2 − 5 = 137 24 × 6 − 2 × 5 = 134 24 × 6 − 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 × 6 × 2 + 5 = 293 24 × 6 × 2 − 5 = 283 24 × 6 × 2 × 5 = 1,440 24 × 6 × 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 × 6 ÷ 2 + 5 = 77 24 × 6 ÷ 2 − 5 = 67 24 × 6 ÷ 2 × 5 = 360 24 × 6 ÷ 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 ÷ 6 + 2 + 5 = 11 24 ÷ 6 + 2 − 5 = 1 24 ÷ 6 + 2 × 5 = 14 ✓ 24 ÷ 6 + 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 ÷ 6 − 2 + 5 = 7 24 ÷ 6 − 2 − 5 = no 24 ÷ 6 − 2 × 5 = no 24 ÷ 6 − 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 ÷ 6 × 2 + 5 = 13 24 ÷ 6 × 2 − 5 = 3 24 ÷ 6 × 2 × 5 = 40 24 ÷ 6 × 2 ÷ 5 = no 24 ÷ 6 ÷ 2 + 5 = 7 24 ÷ 6 ÷ 2 − 5 = no 24 ÷ 6 ÷ 2 × 5 = 10 24 ÷ 6 ÷ 2 ÷ 5 = no - Pick the one that works. Only one of them gives the target.24 ÷ 6 + 2 × 5 = 14
Check. 24 ÷ 6 + 2 × 5 = 14. ✓
Watch out. Remember: × and ÷ are done before + and −.
Chapter summary
| Skill | Method |
|---|---|
| Divide by 10, 100, 1,000 | Every digit moves 1, 2 or 3 places to the RIGHT. Fill empty places with zeros. The decimal point does not move: 4.7 ÷ 10 = 0.47 and 35 ÷ 1,000 = 0.035. |
| Known facts and zeros | Use 42 ÷ 6 = 7 to get 4,200 ÷ 6 = 700 and 4,200 ÷ 60 = 70. Take the same number of zeros off both, then put back what is left. |
| Inverse and fact families | 7 × 80 = 560 gives 560 ÷ 7 = 80 and 560 ÷ 80 = 7. The product is the number you divide. |
| Mental strategies | ÷ 2 halve; ÷ 4 halve twice; ÷ 8 halve three times; ÷ 5 double then ÷ 10; ÷ 20 ÷ 10 then halve; ÷ 25 double twice then ÷ 100; split the divisor into factors; chunking. |
| Short division (bus stop) | Start on the left. Divide each digit plus any carry. Write the answer above. Exchange the remainder for the next place and carry it. Write 0 when a digit is too small. Check: answer × divisor (+ remainder). |
| Remainders | The remainder is smaller than the divisor. Round UP for “how many needed”, round DOWN for “how many full”, use the remainder for “how many left over”. 7 ÷ 2 = 3 r 1 = 3½ = 3.5. |
| Estimating and checking | Round to a number the divisor goes into easily. Multiply back to check. |
| Sharing, grouping, scaling | Sharing: you know the number of groups. Grouping: you know the size of each group. “A fifth as long”: ÷ 5. “How many times as long”: longer ÷ shorter. |
| Rates | “Per” means divide: 392 km in 7 hours is 56 km per hour. Price of one = total ÷ number. Divide both amounts by the same number to scale down. |
| Order of operations | Brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right): 24 + 36 ÷ 4 = 33. |
| The equals sign | It means “is the same value as”. Work out the side you can, then use an inverse operation to find the missing number: 56 ÷ 7 = 4 × [2]. |
| Reasoning | Spot the mistake by doing it yourself. “Prove it” needs working and a sentence. One counter-example breaks “always”. Puzzles: list the possibilities and cross out. |
Can you…?
- I can divide whole numbers and decimals by 10, 100 and 1,000 by moving the digits to the right.
- I can use known facts, place value and the inverse of multiplication to divide in my head.
- I can halve, and use halving, doubling and factors to divide by 4, 5, 8, 20 and 25.
- I can divide a number with up to 4 digits by a one-digit number using short division.
- I can exchange remainders across place values and write a 0 in the answer when I need to.
- I can decide whether to round a remainder up or down, use it as the answer, or write it as a fraction or decimal.
- I can estimate and check a division by multiplying back.
- I can solve sharing, grouping, scaling and rate problems.
- I can use the order of operations and understand the equals sign.
- I can solve multi-step problems with bar models and explain my reasoning.
Key terms
- Divide
- To split an amount into equal parts or groups. Division is the inverse of multiplication.
- Divisor
- The number you divide by. In 56 ÷ 7 the divisor is 7.
- Quotient
- The answer to a division. In 56 ÷ 7 = 8 the quotient is 8.
- Remainder
- The amount left over when a number does not divide exactly, written r. 47 ÷ 5 = 9 r 2.
- Short division
- A written method for dividing by a one-digit number, also called the bus stop method.
- Exchange
- To swap one place value for ten of the next smaller one, such as 1 hundred for 10 tens.
- Place holder
- A zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns, such as the 0 in 1,014.
- Inverse
- The opposite operation. Multiplying and dividing are inverses of each other.
- Fact family
- A set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
- Halve
- To divide by 2.
- Factor
- A whole number that divides exactly into another number.
- Sharing
- Splitting an amount into a known number of equal groups to find the size of each group.
- Grouping
- Finding how many groups of a given size can be made.
- Rate
- A comparison of two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour.
- Per
- A word that means “for each”. It shows a division, such as 56 km per hour.
- Scaling
- Making an amount bigger or smaller, such as “a fifth as long”.
- Estimate
- An answer that is close, found by rounding. Written with ≈.
- Order of operations
- The rules for which part of a calculation to do first: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
- Brackets
- Symbols ( ) that show which part of a calculation to do first.
- Equals sign
- The symbol = which means “is the same value as”. Both sides must balance.
- Counter-example
- One example that shows a statement is false.
Exercise 5Z Check-up (non-calculator)
Non-calculatorKey words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. The decimal point does not move. Fill empty places with zeros.
- Say what dividing by 10 does. Each digit becomes 10 times smaller, so it moves 1 place to the right. The digits move. The decimal point does not.6 ones become 6 tenths
3 tenths become 3 hundredths - Move every digit 1 place to the right. Use a place-value chart and follow the arrows.
- Fill the empty places with zeros. The ones column is empty. A zero in it is a place holder: it keeps every digit in its right column.6.3 ÷ 10 = 0.63
- Write the answer. 6.3 ÷ 10 = 0.63
Check. Go back: 0.63 × 10 = 6.3 (the digits move 1 place to the left). ✓
Watch out. Dividing makes a number smaller. Do not forget the zero in the ones column: write 0.63, not .63.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.4,500 ÷ 90: the digits are 45 ÷ 9
45 ÷ 9 = 5 because 9 × 5 = 45 - Take 1 zero off both numbers. Dividing both numbers by 10 does not change the answer, and it makes the divisor a small number.4,500 ÷ 90 = 450 ÷ 9
- Use the fact on the leading digits. 450 is 45 tens. Share 45 tens into 9 equal groups.45 tens ÷ 9 = 5 tens
5 tens = 50 - Write the answer. 4,500 ÷ 90 = 50
Check. Multiply back: 50 × 90 = 4,500. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros carefully: 4,500 has 2 zeros and 90 has 1 zero. Take the same number off both, then put back what is left.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. To divide by 25, multiply the number by 4 (double, double) and then divide by 100. (There are four 25s in 100.)
- Double the number. We multiply by 4 by doubling twice. (4 × 25 = 100.)1,350 = 1,000 + 300 + 50
double each part: 2,000 + 600 + 100 = 2,700 - Double again. Two doubles make × 4.2,700 = 2,000 + 700
double each part: 4,000 + 1,400 = 5,400 - Divide by 100. Multiplying both numbers by 4 does not change the answer: n ÷ 25 is the same as 4n ÷ 100. Move the digits two places to the right.5,400 ÷ 100 = 54
- Write the answer. 1,350 ÷ 25 = 54
Check. Multiply back: 54 × 25 = 1,350. ✓
Watch out. Remember there are two doubles (× 4), then divide by 100, not 10.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 2 4 3 6 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 6: 2 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 thousands for 20 hundreds. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 hundreds. With the 4 hundreds there are 20 + 4 = 24 hundreds.
24 ÷ 6: 4 × 6 = 24. Write 4 above the 4. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 3 tens.
3 ÷ 6: 3 is smaller than 6, so write 0.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 6 ones there are 30 + 6 = 36 ones.
36 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36. Write 6 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 4 0 6 6 2 24 3 36
2,436 ÷ 6 = 406 - Write the answer. 2,436 ÷ 6 = 406
Check. Multiply back: 406 × 6 = 400 × 6 + 6 × 6 = 2,400 + 36 = 2,436. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 406 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 7 2 6 3 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 9: 7 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 7 thousands for 70 hundreds. Carry 7 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 hundreds. With the 2 hundreds there are 70 + 2 = 72 hundreds.
72 ÷ 9: 8 × 9 = 72. Write 8 above the 2. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 tens.
6 ÷ 9: 6 is smaller than 9, so write 0.
Exchange: 6 tens become 60 ones. Carry 6 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 6 that was carried.The carried 6 makes 60 ones. With the 3 ones there are 60 + 3 = 63 ones.
63 ÷ 9: 7 × 9 = 63. Write 7 above the 3.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 0 7 9 7 72 6 63
7,263 ÷ 9 = 807 - Write the answer. 7,263 ÷ 9 = 807
Check. Multiply back: 807 × 9 = 800 × 9 + 7 × 9 = 7,200 + 63 = 7,263. ✓
Watch out. A 0 in the answer is a place holder. Leave it out and 807 would look like a much smaller number. Write a 0 every time a digit does not divide.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 5 9 4 7 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 6: 5 is smaller than 6, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 thousands for 50 hundreds. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 hundreds. With the 9 hundreds there are 50 + 9 = 59 hundreds.
59 ÷ 6: 9 × 6 = 54, and 59 − 54 = 5. Write 9 above the 9.
Exchange: 5 hundreds become 50 tens. Carry 5 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 tens. With the 4 tens there are 50 + 4 = 54 tens.
54 ÷ 6: 9 × 6 = 54. Write 9 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 7 ones.
7 ÷ 6: 1 × 6 = 6, and 7 − 6 = 1. Write 1 above the 7.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 9 1 r 1 6 5 59 54 7
5,947 ÷ 6 = 991 r 1 - Write the answer. 5,947 ÷ 6 = 991 r 1
Check. Multiply back: 991 × 6 = 900 × 6 + 90 × 6 + 1 × 6 = 5,400 + 540 + 6 = 5,946
5,946 + 1 (the remainder) = 5,947. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 6: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 6.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. Round the number being divided to a number that is easy to divide, then divide it.
- Look at the first two digits of 5,918. They tell us how many hundreds there are, roughly.5,918 is about 59 hundreds
- Find the nearest number in the 7 times table. We want a number that 7 divides into exactly.7 × 8 = 56, and 56 is the closest to 59
- Round the number. Replace 59 hundreds by 56 hundreds.5,918 ≈ 5,600
- Divide the rounded number. Use the fact 56 ÷ 7 = 8.56 hundreds ÷ 7 = 8 hundreds
5,600 ÷ 7 = 800 - Write the estimate. Use the sign ≈ for “is about”.5,918 ÷ 7 ≈ 800
Check. Multiply back: 800 × 7 = 5,600, which is close to 5,918. ✓
Watch out. An estimate is not the exact answer. Use it to check that your exact answer is about the right size.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 95 into groups of 4. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 4 fit into 95, so divide.95 ÷ 4
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 9 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 4 = 2, remainder 1
Write 2 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 5 ones there are 10 + 5 = 15 ones.
15 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12, and 15 − 12 = 3. Write 3 above the 5.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 3 r 3 4 9 15
95 ÷ 4 = 23 r 3 - Say what the remainder means. 95 ÷ 4 = 23 remainder 3: that is 23 full boxes and 3 muffins left over.23 full boxes + 3 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full boxes count. The 3 left over cannot make another one. We round the answer down (we ignore the remainder).23 full boxes
- Write the answer. Include the unit.23 boxes
Check. 23 × 4 = 92 and 92 + 3 = 95. ✓
Watch out. Do not round up here: the extra box would not be full.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. To find a rate, divide the total amount by the number of hours.
- Choose the operation. “A coach travels 252 km in 4 hours at a steady speed” asks for the amount for one hour. The word “per” means “for each”, so divide the total by the number of hours.252 km ÷ 4 hours
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 2 5 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 4: 2 is smaller than 4, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 5 tens there are 20 + 5 = 25 tens.
25 ÷ 4: 6 × 4 = 24, and 25 − 24 = 1. Write 6 above the 5.
Exchange: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12. Write 3 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 3 4 2 25 12
252 ÷ 4 = 63 - Write the answer. Include the unit.63 km per hour
Check. 63 × 4 = 252. ✓
Watch out. Check that you divided the total by the number of units, not the other way round.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Use the order of operations: brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −. Do one step at a time.
- Do the division. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.6 + 48 ÷ 8 × 3 = 6 + 6 × 3
- Do the multiplication. × and ÷ come before + and −. If there are several, go from left to right.6 + 6 × 3 = 6 + 18
- Add. Only + and − are left. Go from left to right.6 + 18 = 24
- Write the answer. 6 + 48 ÷ 8 × 3 = 24
Check. Work through the steps again, and check the order: brackets, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Watch out. Do not just work from left to right. Brackets first, then × and ÷, then + and −.
Key words. The equals sign (=) means “is the same value as”. The two sides of an equals sign balance, like the two sides of a see-saw. A missing number is the number that makes both sides balance.
Method. The equals sign means both sides have the same value. Work out the side you can, then find the number that makes the other side match.
- Work out the side with no missing number. The two sides of an equals sign must have the same value, so first find the value of the side we can work out.72 ÷ 8 = 9
- Look at the other side. It must also be worth 9. Picture a balance.
- Use the opposite operation. 3 times the missing number is 9. Undo the multiplication with a division.9 ÷ 3 = 3
- Write the missing number. Put it back in the box and read the whole sentence.3
Check. 3 × 3 = 9 and 72 ÷ 8 = 9. Both sides are equal. ✓
Watch out. The equals sign does not mean “the answer comes next”. It means both sides balance.
Total 20 marks. Allow about 20 minutes.
Exercise 5X SATs-style questions
Non-calculatorKey words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. First work out 4.5 ÷ 10. Then find the option with the same value.
- Work out the calculation in the question. We need its value to compare with the options.4.5 ÷ 10 = 0.45
- Work out every option. Do not stop at the first one that looks right. Use place value or a known fact.
Option Calculation Value Equal to 0.45? A 45 ÷ 100 0.45 yes B 4.5 ÷ 100 0.045 no C 450 ÷ 10 45 no D 0.45 ÷ 10 0.045 no - Choose the option that matches. Only one option has the right value.A (45 ÷ 100)
Check. Check the chosen option again: it has the value 0.45. ✓
Watch out. Work out all four options. Two of them might look similar.
Key words. Place value tells you what each digit is worth. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Dividing by 10, 100 or 1,000 makes a number 10, 100 or 1,000 times smaller.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the right is ÷ 10, two places is ÷ 100 and three places is ÷ 1,000.
- Compare the two numbers. Look at how the digits have moved from the start number to the answer.7.2 → 0.072
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit moved to the right, so the number got smaller.
- Say what the number is. Digits that move 2 places to the right mean ÷ 100.7.2 ÷ 100 = 0.072
Check. 7.2 ÷ 100 = 0.072. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A mental strategy is a way to work something out in your head by using facts you already know. A factor is a number that divides exactly into another number. To halve is to divide by 2. To double is to multiply by 2.
Method. Use a times table fact. Work out the fact with the zeros hidden, then put the right number of zeros back.
- Spot the times table fact. Cover the zeros. The digits that are left make a fact you know.5,600 ÷ 70: the digits are 56 ÷ 7
56 ÷ 7 = 8 because 7 × 8 = 56 - Take 1 zero off both numbers. Dividing both numbers by 10 does not change the answer, and it makes the divisor a small number.5,600 ÷ 70 = 560 ÷ 7
- Use the fact on the leading digits. 560 is 56 tens. Share 56 tens into 7 equal groups.56 tens ÷ 7 = 8 tens
8 tens = 80 - Write the answer. 5,600 ÷ 70 = 80
Check. Multiply back: 80 × 70 = 5,600. ✓
Watch out. Count the zeros carefully: 5,600 has 2 zeros and 70 has 1 zero. Take the same number off both, then put back what is left.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method): the number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the divisor goes outside. A remainder is what is left over. To exchange is to swap 1 of a place value for 10 of the next smaller one.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, exchange it for the next smaller place value and carry it to the next digit.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 4 3 5 2 - Divide the thousands. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 8: 4 is smaller than 8, so we cannot give each share a whole thousand. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 thousands for 40 hundreds. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the hundreds. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 hundreds. With the 3 hundreds there are 40 + 3 = 43 hundreds.
43 ÷ 8: 5 × 8 = 40, and 43 − 40 = 3. Write 5 above the 3.
Exchange: 3 hundreds become 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 5 tens there are 30 + 5 = 35 tens.
35 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32, and 35 − 32 = 3. Write 4 above the 5.
Exchange: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 2 ones there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones.
32 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32. Write 4 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 5 4 4 8 4 43 35 32
4,352 ÷ 8 = 544 - Write the answer. 4,352 ÷ 8 = 544
Check. Multiply back: 544 × 8 = 500 × 8 + 40 × 8 + 4 × 8 = 4,000 + 320 + 32 = 4,352. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 8, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. The remainder is what is left over after you divide. The quotient is the answer to a division. Whether you round the answer up, round it down or use the remainder depends on the question.
Method. Divide, then think about what the remainder means in the story. The answer might be rounded up, rounded down, or be the remainder itself.
- Draw a bar model. We split 130 into groups of 9. Some may be left over.
- Choose the operation. We want to know how many groups of 9 fit into 130, so divide.130 ÷ 9
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 1 3 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 9: 1 is smaller than 9, so we cannot give each share a whole hundred. Write 0 (a 0 at the front is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 3 tens there are 10 + 3 = 13 tens.
13 ÷ 9: 1 × 9 = 9, and 13 − 9 = 4. Write 1 above the 3.
Exchange: 4 tens become 40 ones. Carry 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 0 ones there are 40 + 0 = 40 ones.
40 ÷ 9: 4 × 9 = 36, and 40 − 36 = 4. Write 4 above the 0.
The remainder is 4. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 1 4 r 4 9 1 13 40
130 ÷ 9 = 14 r 4 - Say what the remainder means. 130 ÷ 9 = 14 remainder 4: that is 14 full minibuses and 4 children left over.14 full minibuses + 4 left over
- Decide what to do with the remainder. The 4 left over still need somewhere to go, so one more minibus is needed. We round the answer up.14 + 1 = 15
- Write the answer. Include the unit.15 minibuses
Check. 14 × 9 = 126 and 126 + 4 = 130. ✓
Watch out. Do not round down here. The 4 left over would have no minibus.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, but not exact. To round a number is to change it to a nearby number that is easier to use. The inverse of dividing is multiplying, and we can use it to check an answer.
Method. To show that a division is right, use the opposite operation: multiply the answer by the number you divided by.
- Write what we have to show. We need to check the division is right.5,432 ÷ 8 = 679
- Multiply the answer by the divisor. If the division is right, this must give the number we started with.679 × 8 = 600 × 8 + 70 × 8 + 9 × 8 = 4,800 + 560 + 72 = 5,432
- Compare and write a conclusion. Say what the working shows.679 × 8 = 5,432, so 5,432 ÷ 8 = 679. It is shown.
Check. Use short division: 5,432 ÷ 8 = 679. ✓
Watch out. Write a sentence at the end. The working alone is not a conclusion.
Key words. A rate compares two amounts, such as £12 for 4 pens or 60 km each hour. A unit rate is the amount for just one (one pen, one hour, one litre). The word “per” means “for each” and tells you to divide.
Method. Use a table. Divide both amounts by the same number and the rate stays the same.
- Put the facts in a table. 12 pens go with £9. We want to know about 4 pens.
÷ 3 → Pens 12 4 Cost £9 ? ÷ 3 → - Find the scale factor. Look at the top row. What do we divide 12 by to get 4?12 ÷ 3 = 4, so divide by 3
- Divide the bottom row by 3 as well. The rate stays the same only if both rows are divided by the same number.£9 ÷ 3
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 9 - Divide the ones. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 3 = 3
Write 3 above the 9.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 3 9
9 ÷ 3 = 3 - Write the answer. £3
Check. £3 × 3 = £9. ✓
Watch out. Divide the top and the bottom by the SAME number.
Key words. A bar model is a drawing that shows the amounts in a problem as bars, so you can see which calculation to do.
Method. Break the problem into steps. Work out one thing at a time and write down what each answer means.
- Draw a bar model. 7 sheets of 54 stickers. Then the total is shared between 9 friends.
- Find the number of stickers. 7 sheets with 54 stickers on each, so multiply.7 × 54 = 378
- Share the stickers. The stickers are shared equally between 9 friends, so divide by 9.378 ÷ 9 = 42
- Write the answer. Include the unit.42 stickers
Check. 42 × 9 = 378. ✓
Watch out. Marks: 1 for 7 × 54 = 378, 1 for 378 ÷ 9, 1 for the correct answer.
Key words. The order of operations says which part of a calculation to do first: brackets first, then × and ÷ (left to right), then + and − (left to right).
Method. Work out the correct answer yourself first. Then compare it with the answer in the question to find the mistake.
- Work it out carefully. Do the question again, one step at a time.Divide first: 18 ÷ 3 = 6. Then add: 6 + 6 = 12.
- Compare with the answer in the question. Leo wrote 8. He did 6 + 18 = 24 and then 24 ÷ 3 = 8.
- Find the mistake. Leo worked from left to right, but the division must be done before the addition.
- Write the correct answer. The correct answer is 12, so Leo is not correct.
Check. With brackets, (6 + 18) ÷ 3 = 8. Leo needed brackets for his answer.
Watch out. Without brackets, ÷ comes before +.
Key words. Multiplying and dividing are inverse (opposite) operations: one undoes the other. A fact family is a set of multiplication and division facts that use the same three numbers.
Method. Work backwards. Undo each step in the opposite order, using the opposite (inverse) operation.
- Write the steps in order. List what was done to the secret number.1. divide by 5
2. add 14
The answer was 30. - Work backwards with the opposite operations. Start at the end and undo each step in reverse order.take away 14: 30 − 14 = 16
multiply by 5: 16 × 5 = 80 - Write the number. The number was 80.
Check. 80 ÷ 5 = 16
16 + 14 = 30
We end at 30. ✓
Watch out. Undo the LAST step first.